1. clippers shunt positive clippers - · pdf fileec & ld lab - 10csl38 2015 - 16 dept. of...
TRANSCRIPT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 1
1 Clippers Shunt Positive clippers
a) To remove +ve peak above Vr level
Circuit diagram Waveform Transfer Characteristics
b) To remove +ve peak above some level (VR + Vγ)
Circuit diagram Waveform Transfer Characteristics
Design
1 To remove +ve peak above some level say (+3v)
Solution Vo= VR + Vγ
Vo= +3V then
VR = Vo ndash Vγ
VR = 3V ndash 07V (cut in voltage of diode)
VR = 23V
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 2
Experiment No 01 Date ________________
CLIPPERS amp CLAMPERS
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and demonstrate the working of positive
clippers double-ended clippers and positive clampers using diodes
b Demonstrate the working of the above circuits using a simulation package
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Diode BY 127 02
2 Resistors 1 K 100 K 01 01
3 Capacitor 1f 01
4 Functional Generator 01
5 Multi-meter CRO amp Probes 01 Set
6 Base Board and Wires 01 Set
CLIPPERS
Theory
Clipper is a circuit which removes a part of the input signal with out distorting the
remaining part of the waveform It may be positive or negative part of an input signal
Clipping circuits is also known as limiters amplitude selectors or slicers This kind of
processing is useful for signal shaping circuit protection and communication
Based on working clippers circuits are classified as
1 Positive clipper one which removes positive part of signal
2 Negative clipper one which removes negative part of signal
Based on diode arrangement clipper circuit are classified as
1 Series Clipper
2 Shunt Clipper
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 3
c) To remove +ve peak above some level (say +3 v) amp -ve peak above some level (say -3v)
Circuit diagram Waveform Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 4
Procedure
1 Before making connections components are checked for good working conditions
2 Make the connections as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Using a signal generator apply a sine wave input Vi whose amplitude is greater than the
clipping level is applied to the circuit
4 Output waveform V0 is observed on the CRO Record the amplitude and time period from
the waveforms
5 For transfer characteristics the input voltage is given to the channel 2 output voltage is
given to the channel 1 and XY plotter is pressed
6 Clipped voltage is measured and verified with the designed values
Results
SL
No Clipper type Output (Theoretical)
Output (Practical)
Hardware
Output (Practical)
Software Remarks
1 Shunt positive
(without biasing)
2 Shunt positive
(with biasing)
3 Shunt positive
(with biasing)
4 Double ended
(without biasing)
5 Double ended
(with biasing)
6 Double ended
(with biasing)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 5
2 Clampers
a) Positive peak clamped at reference voltage (Vr) level
Circuit diagram Waveform
b) Negative peak clamped to Vr level
Circuit diagram Wave form
Design
RL Cgtgt T
Assume T = 1 ms let RL C = 100 T then RL C = 100 ms
Let R1 = 100 K C = 1 f
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 6
CLAMPERS
Theory
Clamper adds a DC voltage to the AC level of input signal Sometimes it is necessary
to add the DC level to the AC output signal The circuits which are used to add DC level as
per the requirements to the AC output signal are called clamper circuits The capacitor diode
and resistance are the three basic elements of a clamper circuit The clamper circuits are also
called DC restorer or DC inserter circuits
Depending upon the positive DC or negative DC shift introduced in the output
waveform the clampers are classified as
a Positive clampers
b Negative clampers
A negative clamper is a circuit which adds a negative level to the AC output The
output waveform consists of a capacitor C ideal diode D and the load resistance RL During
the +ve cycle of the ip voltage Vi the capacitor gets charged through forward biased diode
bdquoD‟ up to the maximum value Vm of the ip signal Vi In the ndashve half cycle the diode D will
be remains reverse biased and the capacitor will be discharging through the resistance RL
In positive clamper by charging the orientation of the diode in the negative the +ve
clamper circuit can be achieved
During negative half cycle of the ip voltage Vi the diode D gets forward biased and
almost instantaneously the capacitor C gets charged In the positive half cycle the diode D is
reverse biased the capacitor starts discharging through RL
Both +ve amp -ve clampers are widely used for instance in television receivers to
change the reference level of video signals clampers are also used in radar and
communication circuits
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 7
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 8
Procedure
1 Components are checked for their good working conditions
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A square wave input Vi is applied through ASG
4 Keeping the ACDC knob of the CRO in DC position Output wave form V0 is observed
on the CRO
5 Clamped voltage is measured and verified with the designed values
Results
SL
No Clamper type Output (Theoretical)
Output (Practical)
Hardware
Output (Practical)
Software Remarks
1 Positive
(without biasing) 07 V
2 Negative
(without biasing) 07 V
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 9
Circuit diagram RC - Coupled Amplifier
( a )
Design Given VCE = 5 V and IC = 2 mA Assume = 100
VCC = 2VCE = 2 X 5 = 10 V
Let VRE = 10 VCC = 1 V
RE = VRE ( IC + IB )
IB = IC = 2 mA 100 = 20 A
RE = 1 ( 2 m + 20 ) = 495
Choose RE = 470
Apply KVL to collector loop
VCC ndash IC RC ndash VCE ndash VE = 0
RC = ( VCC ndash VCE ndash VE ) IC = ( 10 ndash 5 ndash 1 ) 2 m
RC = 2 k Choose RC = 18 k
Let IR1 = 10 IB = 10 X 20 A = 200 A
VR2 = VBE + VE = 06 + 1 = 16 V( Since transistor is silicon make VBE = 06 V )
R2 = VR2 ( IR1 ndash IB ) = 16 ( 200 A - 20 A )
R2 = 88 k Choose R2 = 82 k
R1 = ( VCC ndash VR2 ) IR1 = ( 10 ndash 16 ) 200 A
R1 = 42 K Choose R1 = 47 k
XCE lt lt RE
XCE = RE 10
1 ( 2 f CE ) = 470 10 Let f = 100 Hz
CE = 33 F Choose CE = 47 F
Choose CC1 = CC2 = 01 F
C
B
E
SL100
or
CL100
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 10
Experiment No 02 Date ________________
RC ndash COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the frequency response input
impedance output impedance and bandwidth of a CE amplifier
b Design and build the CE amplifier circuit using a simulation package and determine
the voltage gain for two different values of supply voltage and for two different values
of emitter resistance
Apparatus
Theory
An amplifier is a circuit which increases the voltage current or power of ip signal
where the frequency is maintained constant from op to ip signal The common collector or
emitter follower circuit has high ip impedance Typically it is 200K to 300K A single
stage emitter follower has ip impedance up to 800K The ip impedance of circuit can be
improved by direct coupling two stages of emitter follower amplifier CE amplifier provides
current in turn voltage amplification The ratio of Collector current to base current is noted as
the current amplification factor and is denoted as bdquo‟ie[ = ICIB] is very large
RC-Coupled amplifier is employed as voltage amplifier and where non-linear
distortion is less because it has an excellent audio frequency over a wide range of
frequencies Circuit contain voltage divider resistor [R1 amp R2]
R1 R2 and RC are selected in such a way that transistor operates in active region Re
is used for stabilization of operating point Coupling capacitor is used to block dc current
The emitter by-pass capacitor Ce is connected to avoid negative feedback
Input signal increases base current in turn collector current increases [ie Ic = Ib]
Hence output voltage is large compared to input voltage which is known as amplification
Sl No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Transistor SL 100 01
2 Resistors as per design
3 Capacitors 47 f 01f 01 02
4 DRB 01
5 Multimeter + CRO Probes 01 Set
6 Base Board + Wires 01 Set
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 11
Tabular Column
Vi = mV
f in Hz Vo in Volts Av = (Vo Vi) Av db = 20 log (Vo Vi)
Simulation Results
Sl NO Vi in Volts Vo in Volts Av = (VoVi) Av in db Av in db using Bode plotter
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 12
Procedure
1 Components Equipment are tested for their good working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 By keeping the voltage knobs in minimum position and current knob in maximum
position switch on the power supply
4 By disconnecting the AC source measure the quiescent point (VCE and IC = VRC RC)
I) To plot the frequency response
1 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region (around 10 kHz) and the input voltage
is adjusted to a convenient value in ASG so that the output waveform is distortion less
and this value of input voltage must be kept constant throughout the experiment
2 Frequency of the input signal is varied from 10Hz to its max Value 10MHz in steps and
at each step corresponding output voltage Vo is noted down
3 All the readings are tabulated and a graph of gain in db vs frequency in Hz is plotted on a
semi log sheet
4 3db bandwidth is determined from the frequency response curve
II) To measure input impedance (Zi)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (c)
2 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region with all knobs of DRB in the Zero
position the output voltage falls to half of the initial output voltage
3 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to input impedance Zi of the amplifier +
signal generator resistance 50
Therefore Zi = DRB Value ndash Audio Signal Generator Resistance (50)
[Note Zi lt R1 | | R2]
III) To measure output impedance (Zo)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (d)
2 In the mid-band frequency region (where the gain is constant) with DRB in its max
Value the output voltage is measured
3 The DRB is varied till the output voltage falls to half the initial value
4 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to the output impedance Zo of the amplifier
[Note Zo lt Rd]
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 13
WORKSHEET
Frequency response
(b)
Input impedance Output impedance
(c) (d)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 14
IV) To find the Gain Bandwidth Product (GBW)
1 Gain Bandwidth Product = Max gain (without db) X bandwidth (Figure of merit)
= Avm X (f2 ndash f1) Hz
Results
1 Quiescent point VCE = ____ V IC = _____ mA
2 Maximum Gain Av=helliphelliphellip
3 Input Impedance Zi = helliphellipΩ
4 Output Impedance Zo = helliphellipΩ
5 Bandwidth BW= helliphellipHz
6 Figure of Merit FM (GBW) helliphellip
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 15
MOSFET Circuit Diagram
Tabular Column
Transfer Characteristics
VDS1 = _____________ V VDS1 = _____________ V
VGS in Volt ID in mA VGS in Volt ID in mA
G D S
IRF 540
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 16
Experiment No 03 Date ________________
STATIC CHARACTERISTICS OF MOSFET
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the drain characteristics and
transconductance characteristics of an enhancement-mode MOSFET
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 MOSFET ( IRF 540 ) - 1
2 Milliammeter 0-20200mA 1
3 Multimeter - 1
4 Sping board amp Connecting wires - few
Theory
A MOSFET is a voltage controlled device and requires a only a small input current
The switching speed of MOSFET is very high and the switching time s are of the order of
nanoseconds It has very high input impedance and works at very high switching frequency
MOSFETs are of two types namely Enhancement type and Depletion type Each type
are subdivided into two types namely p-channel and n-channel IRF 540 is an n-channel
enhancement MOSFET An n-channel enhancement MOSFET has N substrate with p-
impurities on other side A thin layer of metal oxide is deposited over the left side of the
channel A metallic gate is deposited over the silicon di oxide layer which is an insulator
Hence gate is insulated from the channel and for this reason MOSFET is sometimes called
insulated gate FET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 17
ID
VGS
ID in mA
VDS1
VDS2
Tabular Column
Drain Characteristics
VGS1 = _____________ V VGS1 = _____________ V
VDS in Volt ID in mA VDS in Volt ID in mA
Ideal Graph
Transfer Characteristics Drain Characteristics
ID in mA
VT VGS in V
VDS2 gt VDS1
VDS in V
VGS1
VGS2 ID VDS
VGS2 gt VGS1
Constant resistance region
Constant current region
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 18
Procedure
Transfer Characteristics
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Set VDS to some convenient voltage (say 02 V)
4 Increase VGS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
5 Repeat the above step for different value of VDS (say 03 V)
6 A graph of VGS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph Trans conductance is calculated
Output Characteristics
1 Set VGS to some convenient voltage greater than threshold voltage VT
2 Increase VDS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
3 Repeat the above step for different value of VGS
4 A graph of VDS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph drain resistance is calculated
Results
Transconductance gm = ID VGS = ____________ mho
Drain Resistance RD = VDS ID = ____________
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 2
Experiment No 01 Date ________________
CLIPPERS amp CLAMPERS
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and demonstrate the working of positive
clippers double-ended clippers and positive clampers using diodes
b Demonstrate the working of the above circuits using a simulation package
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Diode BY 127 02
2 Resistors 1 K 100 K 01 01
3 Capacitor 1f 01
4 Functional Generator 01
5 Multi-meter CRO amp Probes 01 Set
6 Base Board and Wires 01 Set
CLIPPERS
Theory
Clipper is a circuit which removes a part of the input signal with out distorting the
remaining part of the waveform It may be positive or negative part of an input signal
Clipping circuits is also known as limiters amplitude selectors or slicers This kind of
processing is useful for signal shaping circuit protection and communication
Based on working clippers circuits are classified as
1 Positive clipper one which removes positive part of signal
2 Negative clipper one which removes negative part of signal
Based on diode arrangement clipper circuit are classified as
1 Series Clipper
2 Shunt Clipper
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 3
c) To remove +ve peak above some level (say +3 v) amp -ve peak above some level (say -3v)
Circuit diagram Waveform Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 4
Procedure
1 Before making connections components are checked for good working conditions
2 Make the connections as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Using a signal generator apply a sine wave input Vi whose amplitude is greater than the
clipping level is applied to the circuit
4 Output waveform V0 is observed on the CRO Record the amplitude and time period from
the waveforms
5 For transfer characteristics the input voltage is given to the channel 2 output voltage is
given to the channel 1 and XY plotter is pressed
6 Clipped voltage is measured and verified with the designed values
Results
SL
No Clipper type Output (Theoretical)
Output (Practical)
Hardware
Output (Practical)
Software Remarks
1 Shunt positive
(without biasing)
2 Shunt positive
(with biasing)
3 Shunt positive
(with biasing)
4 Double ended
(without biasing)
5 Double ended
(with biasing)
6 Double ended
(with biasing)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 5
2 Clampers
a) Positive peak clamped at reference voltage (Vr) level
Circuit diagram Waveform
b) Negative peak clamped to Vr level
Circuit diagram Wave form
Design
RL Cgtgt T
Assume T = 1 ms let RL C = 100 T then RL C = 100 ms
Let R1 = 100 K C = 1 f
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 6
CLAMPERS
Theory
Clamper adds a DC voltage to the AC level of input signal Sometimes it is necessary
to add the DC level to the AC output signal The circuits which are used to add DC level as
per the requirements to the AC output signal are called clamper circuits The capacitor diode
and resistance are the three basic elements of a clamper circuit The clamper circuits are also
called DC restorer or DC inserter circuits
Depending upon the positive DC or negative DC shift introduced in the output
waveform the clampers are classified as
a Positive clampers
b Negative clampers
A negative clamper is a circuit which adds a negative level to the AC output The
output waveform consists of a capacitor C ideal diode D and the load resistance RL During
the +ve cycle of the ip voltage Vi the capacitor gets charged through forward biased diode
bdquoD‟ up to the maximum value Vm of the ip signal Vi In the ndashve half cycle the diode D will
be remains reverse biased and the capacitor will be discharging through the resistance RL
In positive clamper by charging the orientation of the diode in the negative the +ve
clamper circuit can be achieved
During negative half cycle of the ip voltage Vi the diode D gets forward biased and
almost instantaneously the capacitor C gets charged In the positive half cycle the diode D is
reverse biased the capacitor starts discharging through RL
Both +ve amp -ve clampers are widely used for instance in television receivers to
change the reference level of video signals clampers are also used in radar and
communication circuits
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 7
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 8
Procedure
1 Components are checked for their good working conditions
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A square wave input Vi is applied through ASG
4 Keeping the ACDC knob of the CRO in DC position Output wave form V0 is observed
on the CRO
5 Clamped voltage is measured and verified with the designed values
Results
SL
No Clamper type Output (Theoretical)
Output (Practical)
Hardware
Output (Practical)
Software Remarks
1 Positive
(without biasing) 07 V
2 Negative
(without biasing) 07 V
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 9
Circuit diagram RC - Coupled Amplifier
( a )
Design Given VCE = 5 V and IC = 2 mA Assume = 100
VCC = 2VCE = 2 X 5 = 10 V
Let VRE = 10 VCC = 1 V
RE = VRE ( IC + IB )
IB = IC = 2 mA 100 = 20 A
RE = 1 ( 2 m + 20 ) = 495
Choose RE = 470
Apply KVL to collector loop
VCC ndash IC RC ndash VCE ndash VE = 0
RC = ( VCC ndash VCE ndash VE ) IC = ( 10 ndash 5 ndash 1 ) 2 m
RC = 2 k Choose RC = 18 k
Let IR1 = 10 IB = 10 X 20 A = 200 A
VR2 = VBE + VE = 06 + 1 = 16 V( Since transistor is silicon make VBE = 06 V )
R2 = VR2 ( IR1 ndash IB ) = 16 ( 200 A - 20 A )
R2 = 88 k Choose R2 = 82 k
R1 = ( VCC ndash VR2 ) IR1 = ( 10 ndash 16 ) 200 A
R1 = 42 K Choose R1 = 47 k
XCE lt lt RE
XCE = RE 10
1 ( 2 f CE ) = 470 10 Let f = 100 Hz
CE = 33 F Choose CE = 47 F
Choose CC1 = CC2 = 01 F
C
B
E
SL100
or
CL100
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 10
Experiment No 02 Date ________________
RC ndash COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the frequency response input
impedance output impedance and bandwidth of a CE amplifier
b Design and build the CE amplifier circuit using a simulation package and determine
the voltage gain for two different values of supply voltage and for two different values
of emitter resistance
Apparatus
Theory
An amplifier is a circuit which increases the voltage current or power of ip signal
where the frequency is maintained constant from op to ip signal The common collector or
emitter follower circuit has high ip impedance Typically it is 200K to 300K A single
stage emitter follower has ip impedance up to 800K The ip impedance of circuit can be
improved by direct coupling two stages of emitter follower amplifier CE amplifier provides
current in turn voltage amplification The ratio of Collector current to base current is noted as
the current amplification factor and is denoted as bdquo‟ie[ = ICIB] is very large
RC-Coupled amplifier is employed as voltage amplifier and where non-linear
distortion is less because it has an excellent audio frequency over a wide range of
frequencies Circuit contain voltage divider resistor [R1 amp R2]
R1 R2 and RC are selected in such a way that transistor operates in active region Re
is used for stabilization of operating point Coupling capacitor is used to block dc current
The emitter by-pass capacitor Ce is connected to avoid negative feedback
Input signal increases base current in turn collector current increases [ie Ic = Ib]
Hence output voltage is large compared to input voltage which is known as amplification
Sl No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Transistor SL 100 01
2 Resistors as per design
3 Capacitors 47 f 01f 01 02
4 DRB 01
5 Multimeter + CRO Probes 01 Set
6 Base Board + Wires 01 Set
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 11
Tabular Column
Vi = mV
f in Hz Vo in Volts Av = (Vo Vi) Av db = 20 log (Vo Vi)
Simulation Results
Sl NO Vi in Volts Vo in Volts Av = (VoVi) Av in db Av in db using Bode plotter
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 12
Procedure
1 Components Equipment are tested for their good working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 By keeping the voltage knobs in minimum position and current knob in maximum
position switch on the power supply
4 By disconnecting the AC source measure the quiescent point (VCE and IC = VRC RC)
I) To plot the frequency response
1 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region (around 10 kHz) and the input voltage
is adjusted to a convenient value in ASG so that the output waveform is distortion less
and this value of input voltage must be kept constant throughout the experiment
2 Frequency of the input signal is varied from 10Hz to its max Value 10MHz in steps and
at each step corresponding output voltage Vo is noted down
3 All the readings are tabulated and a graph of gain in db vs frequency in Hz is plotted on a
semi log sheet
4 3db bandwidth is determined from the frequency response curve
II) To measure input impedance (Zi)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (c)
2 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region with all knobs of DRB in the Zero
position the output voltage falls to half of the initial output voltage
3 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to input impedance Zi of the amplifier +
signal generator resistance 50
Therefore Zi = DRB Value ndash Audio Signal Generator Resistance (50)
[Note Zi lt R1 | | R2]
III) To measure output impedance (Zo)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (d)
2 In the mid-band frequency region (where the gain is constant) with DRB in its max
Value the output voltage is measured
3 The DRB is varied till the output voltage falls to half the initial value
4 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to the output impedance Zo of the amplifier
[Note Zo lt Rd]
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 13
WORKSHEET
Frequency response
(b)
Input impedance Output impedance
(c) (d)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 14
IV) To find the Gain Bandwidth Product (GBW)
1 Gain Bandwidth Product = Max gain (without db) X bandwidth (Figure of merit)
= Avm X (f2 ndash f1) Hz
Results
1 Quiescent point VCE = ____ V IC = _____ mA
2 Maximum Gain Av=helliphelliphellip
3 Input Impedance Zi = helliphellipΩ
4 Output Impedance Zo = helliphellipΩ
5 Bandwidth BW= helliphellipHz
6 Figure of Merit FM (GBW) helliphellip
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 15
MOSFET Circuit Diagram
Tabular Column
Transfer Characteristics
VDS1 = _____________ V VDS1 = _____________ V
VGS in Volt ID in mA VGS in Volt ID in mA
G D S
IRF 540
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 16
Experiment No 03 Date ________________
STATIC CHARACTERISTICS OF MOSFET
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the drain characteristics and
transconductance characteristics of an enhancement-mode MOSFET
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 MOSFET ( IRF 540 ) - 1
2 Milliammeter 0-20200mA 1
3 Multimeter - 1
4 Sping board amp Connecting wires - few
Theory
A MOSFET is a voltage controlled device and requires a only a small input current
The switching speed of MOSFET is very high and the switching time s are of the order of
nanoseconds It has very high input impedance and works at very high switching frequency
MOSFETs are of two types namely Enhancement type and Depletion type Each type
are subdivided into two types namely p-channel and n-channel IRF 540 is an n-channel
enhancement MOSFET An n-channel enhancement MOSFET has N substrate with p-
impurities on other side A thin layer of metal oxide is deposited over the left side of the
channel A metallic gate is deposited over the silicon di oxide layer which is an insulator
Hence gate is insulated from the channel and for this reason MOSFET is sometimes called
insulated gate FET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 17
ID
VGS
ID in mA
VDS1
VDS2
Tabular Column
Drain Characteristics
VGS1 = _____________ V VGS1 = _____________ V
VDS in Volt ID in mA VDS in Volt ID in mA
Ideal Graph
Transfer Characteristics Drain Characteristics
ID in mA
VT VGS in V
VDS2 gt VDS1
VDS in V
VGS1
VGS2 ID VDS
VGS2 gt VGS1
Constant resistance region
Constant current region
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 18
Procedure
Transfer Characteristics
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Set VDS to some convenient voltage (say 02 V)
4 Increase VGS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
5 Repeat the above step for different value of VDS (say 03 V)
6 A graph of VGS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph Trans conductance is calculated
Output Characteristics
1 Set VGS to some convenient voltage greater than threshold voltage VT
2 Increase VDS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
3 Repeat the above step for different value of VGS
4 A graph of VDS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph drain resistance is calculated
Results
Transconductance gm = ID VGS = ____________ mho
Drain Resistance RD = VDS ID = ____________
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 3
c) To remove +ve peak above some level (say +3 v) amp -ve peak above some level (say -3v)
Circuit diagram Waveform Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 4
Procedure
1 Before making connections components are checked for good working conditions
2 Make the connections as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Using a signal generator apply a sine wave input Vi whose amplitude is greater than the
clipping level is applied to the circuit
4 Output waveform V0 is observed on the CRO Record the amplitude and time period from
the waveforms
5 For transfer characteristics the input voltage is given to the channel 2 output voltage is
given to the channel 1 and XY plotter is pressed
6 Clipped voltage is measured and verified with the designed values
Results
SL
No Clipper type Output (Theoretical)
Output (Practical)
Hardware
Output (Practical)
Software Remarks
1 Shunt positive
(without biasing)
2 Shunt positive
(with biasing)
3 Shunt positive
(with biasing)
4 Double ended
(without biasing)
5 Double ended
(with biasing)
6 Double ended
(with biasing)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 5
2 Clampers
a) Positive peak clamped at reference voltage (Vr) level
Circuit diagram Waveform
b) Negative peak clamped to Vr level
Circuit diagram Wave form
Design
RL Cgtgt T
Assume T = 1 ms let RL C = 100 T then RL C = 100 ms
Let R1 = 100 K C = 1 f
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 6
CLAMPERS
Theory
Clamper adds a DC voltage to the AC level of input signal Sometimes it is necessary
to add the DC level to the AC output signal The circuits which are used to add DC level as
per the requirements to the AC output signal are called clamper circuits The capacitor diode
and resistance are the three basic elements of a clamper circuit The clamper circuits are also
called DC restorer or DC inserter circuits
Depending upon the positive DC or negative DC shift introduced in the output
waveform the clampers are classified as
a Positive clampers
b Negative clampers
A negative clamper is a circuit which adds a negative level to the AC output The
output waveform consists of a capacitor C ideal diode D and the load resistance RL During
the +ve cycle of the ip voltage Vi the capacitor gets charged through forward biased diode
bdquoD‟ up to the maximum value Vm of the ip signal Vi In the ndashve half cycle the diode D will
be remains reverse biased and the capacitor will be discharging through the resistance RL
In positive clamper by charging the orientation of the diode in the negative the +ve
clamper circuit can be achieved
During negative half cycle of the ip voltage Vi the diode D gets forward biased and
almost instantaneously the capacitor C gets charged In the positive half cycle the diode D is
reverse biased the capacitor starts discharging through RL
Both +ve amp -ve clampers are widely used for instance in television receivers to
change the reference level of video signals clampers are also used in radar and
communication circuits
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 7
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 8
Procedure
1 Components are checked for their good working conditions
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A square wave input Vi is applied through ASG
4 Keeping the ACDC knob of the CRO in DC position Output wave form V0 is observed
on the CRO
5 Clamped voltage is measured and verified with the designed values
Results
SL
No Clamper type Output (Theoretical)
Output (Practical)
Hardware
Output (Practical)
Software Remarks
1 Positive
(without biasing) 07 V
2 Negative
(without biasing) 07 V
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 9
Circuit diagram RC - Coupled Amplifier
( a )
Design Given VCE = 5 V and IC = 2 mA Assume = 100
VCC = 2VCE = 2 X 5 = 10 V
Let VRE = 10 VCC = 1 V
RE = VRE ( IC + IB )
IB = IC = 2 mA 100 = 20 A
RE = 1 ( 2 m + 20 ) = 495
Choose RE = 470
Apply KVL to collector loop
VCC ndash IC RC ndash VCE ndash VE = 0
RC = ( VCC ndash VCE ndash VE ) IC = ( 10 ndash 5 ndash 1 ) 2 m
RC = 2 k Choose RC = 18 k
Let IR1 = 10 IB = 10 X 20 A = 200 A
VR2 = VBE + VE = 06 + 1 = 16 V( Since transistor is silicon make VBE = 06 V )
R2 = VR2 ( IR1 ndash IB ) = 16 ( 200 A - 20 A )
R2 = 88 k Choose R2 = 82 k
R1 = ( VCC ndash VR2 ) IR1 = ( 10 ndash 16 ) 200 A
R1 = 42 K Choose R1 = 47 k
XCE lt lt RE
XCE = RE 10
1 ( 2 f CE ) = 470 10 Let f = 100 Hz
CE = 33 F Choose CE = 47 F
Choose CC1 = CC2 = 01 F
C
B
E
SL100
or
CL100
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 10
Experiment No 02 Date ________________
RC ndash COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the frequency response input
impedance output impedance and bandwidth of a CE amplifier
b Design and build the CE amplifier circuit using a simulation package and determine
the voltage gain for two different values of supply voltage and for two different values
of emitter resistance
Apparatus
Theory
An amplifier is a circuit which increases the voltage current or power of ip signal
where the frequency is maintained constant from op to ip signal The common collector or
emitter follower circuit has high ip impedance Typically it is 200K to 300K A single
stage emitter follower has ip impedance up to 800K The ip impedance of circuit can be
improved by direct coupling two stages of emitter follower amplifier CE amplifier provides
current in turn voltage amplification The ratio of Collector current to base current is noted as
the current amplification factor and is denoted as bdquo‟ie[ = ICIB] is very large
RC-Coupled amplifier is employed as voltage amplifier and where non-linear
distortion is less because it has an excellent audio frequency over a wide range of
frequencies Circuit contain voltage divider resistor [R1 amp R2]
R1 R2 and RC are selected in such a way that transistor operates in active region Re
is used for stabilization of operating point Coupling capacitor is used to block dc current
The emitter by-pass capacitor Ce is connected to avoid negative feedback
Input signal increases base current in turn collector current increases [ie Ic = Ib]
Hence output voltage is large compared to input voltage which is known as amplification
Sl No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Transistor SL 100 01
2 Resistors as per design
3 Capacitors 47 f 01f 01 02
4 DRB 01
5 Multimeter + CRO Probes 01 Set
6 Base Board + Wires 01 Set
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 11
Tabular Column
Vi = mV
f in Hz Vo in Volts Av = (Vo Vi) Av db = 20 log (Vo Vi)
Simulation Results
Sl NO Vi in Volts Vo in Volts Av = (VoVi) Av in db Av in db using Bode plotter
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 12
Procedure
1 Components Equipment are tested for their good working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 By keeping the voltage knobs in minimum position and current knob in maximum
position switch on the power supply
4 By disconnecting the AC source measure the quiescent point (VCE and IC = VRC RC)
I) To plot the frequency response
1 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region (around 10 kHz) and the input voltage
is adjusted to a convenient value in ASG so that the output waveform is distortion less
and this value of input voltage must be kept constant throughout the experiment
2 Frequency of the input signal is varied from 10Hz to its max Value 10MHz in steps and
at each step corresponding output voltage Vo is noted down
3 All the readings are tabulated and a graph of gain in db vs frequency in Hz is plotted on a
semi log sheet
4 3db bandwidth is determined from the frequency response curve
II) To measure input impedance (Zi)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (c)
2 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region with all knobs of DRB in the Zero
position the output voltage falls to half of the initial output voltage
3 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to input impedance Zi of the amplifier +
signal generator resistance 50
Therefore Zi = DRB Value ndash Audio Signal Generator Resistance (50)
[Note Zi lt R1 | | R2]
III) To measure output impedance (Zo)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (d)
2 In the mid-band frequency region (where the gain is constant) with DRB in its max
Value the output voltage is measured
3 The DRB is varied till the output voltage falls to half the initial value
4 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to the output impedance Zo of the amplifier
[Note Zo lt Rd]
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 13
WORKSHEET
Frequency response
(b)
Input impedance Output impedance
(c) (d)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 14
IV) To find the Gain Bandwidth Product (GBW)
1 Gain Bandwidth Product = Max gain (without db) X bandwidth (Figure of merit)
= Avm X (f2 ndash f1) Hz
Results
1 Quiescent point VCE = ____ V IC = _____ mA
2 Maximum Gain Av=helliphelliphellip
3 Input Impedance Zi = helliphellipΩ
4 Output Impedance Zo = helliphellipΩ
5 Bandwidth BW= helliphellipHz
6 Figure of Merit FM (GBW) helliphellip
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 15
MOSFET Circuit Diagram
Tabular Column
Transfer Characteristics
VDS1 = _____________ V VDS1 = _____________ V
VGS in Volt ID in mA VGS in Volt ID in mA
G D S
IRF 540
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 16
Experiment No 03 Date ________________
STATIC CHARACTERISTICS OF MOSFET
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the drain characteristics and
transconductance characteristics of an enhancement-mode MOSFET
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 MOSFET ( IRF 540 ) - 1
2 Milliammeter 0-20200mA 1
3 Multimeter - 1
4 Sping board amp Connecting wires - few
Theory
A MOSFET is a voltage controlled device and requires a only a small input current
The switching speed of MOSFET is very high and the switching time s are of the order of
nanoseconds It has very high input impedance and works at very high switching frequency
MOSFETs are of two types namely Enhancement type and Depletion type Each type
are subdivided into two types namely p-channel and n-channel IRF 540 is an n-channel
enhancement MOSFET An n-channel enhancement MOSFET has N substrate with p-
impurities on other side A thin layer of metal oxide is deposited over the left side of the
channel A metallic gate is deposited over the silicon di oxide layer which is an insulator
Hence gate is insulated from the channel and for this reason MOSFET is sometimes called
insulated gate FET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 17
ID
VGS
ID in mA
VDS1
VDS2
Tabular Column
Drain Characteristics
VGS1 = _____________ V VGS1 = _____________ V
VDS in Volt ID in mA VDS in Volt ID in mA
Ideal Graph
Transfer Characteristics Drain Characteristics
ID in mA
VT VGS in V
VDS2 gt VDS1
VDS in V
VGS1
VGS2 ID VDS
VGS2 gt VGS1
Constant resistance region
Constant current region
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 18
Procedure
Transfer Characteristics
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Set VDS to some convenient voltage (say 02 V)
4 Increase VGS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
5 Repeat the above step for different value of VDS (say 03 V)
6 A graph of VGS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph Trans conductance is calculated
Output Characteristics
1 Set VGS to some convenient voltage greater than threshold voltage VT
2 Increase VDS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
3 Repeat the above step for different value of VGS
4 A graph of VDS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph drain resistance is calculated
Results
Transconductance gm = ID VGS = ____________ mho
Drain Resistance RD = VDS ID = ____________
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 4
Procedure
1 Before making connections components are checked for good working conditions
2 Make the connections as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Using a signal generator apply a sine wave input Vi whose amplitude is greater than the
clipping level is applied to the circuit
4 Output waveform V0 is observed on the CRO Record the amplitude and time period from
the waveforms
5 For transfer characteristics the input voltage is given to the channel 2 output voltage is
given to the channel 1 and XY plotter is pressed
6 Clipped voltage is measured and verified with the designed values
Results
SL
No Clipper type Output (Theoretical)
Output (Practical)
Hardware
Output (Practical)
Software Remarks
1 Shunt positive
(without biasing)
2 Shunt positive
(with biasing)
3 Shunt positive
(with biasing)
4 Double ended
(without biasing)
5 Double ended
(with biasing)
6 Double ended
(with biasing)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 5
2 Clampers
a) Positive peak clamped at reference voltage (Vr) level
Circuit diagram Waveform
b) Negative peak clamped to Vr level
Circuit diagram Wave form
Design
RL Cgtgt T
Assume T = 1 ms let RL C = 100 T then RL C = 100 ms
Let R1 = 100 K C = 1 f
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 6
CLAMPERS
Theory
Clamper adds a DC voltage to the AC level of input signal Sometimes it is necessary
to add the DC level to the AC output signal The circuits which are used to add DC level as
per the requirements to the AC output signal are called clamper circuits The capacitor diode
and resistance are the three basic elements of a clamper circuit The clamper circuits are also
called DC restorer or DC inserter circuits
Depending upon the positive DC or negative DC shift introduced in the output
waveform the clampers are classified as
a Positive clampers
b Negative clampers
A negative clamper is a circuit which adds a negative level to the AC output The
output waveform consists of a capacitor C ideal diode D and the load resistance RL During
the +ve cycle of the ip voltage Vi the capacitor gets charged through forward biased diode
bdquoD‟ up to the maximum value Vm of the ip signal Vi In the ndashve half cycle the diode D will
be remains reverse biased and the capacitor will be discharging through the resistance RL
In positive clamper by charging the orientation of the diode in the negative the +ve
clamper circuit can be achieved
During negative half cycle of the ip voltage Vi the diode D gets forward biased and
almost instantaneously the capacitor C gets charged In the positive half cycle the diode D is
reverse biased the capacitor starts discharging through RL
Both +ve amp -ve clampers are widely used for instance in television receivers to
change the reference level of video signals clampers are also used in radar and
communication circuits
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 7
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 8
Procedure
1 Components are checked for their good working conditions
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A square wave input Vi is applied through ASG
4 Keeping the ACDC knob of the CRO in DC position Output wave form V0 is observed
on the CRO
5 Clamped voltage is measured and verified with the designed values
Results
SL
No Clamper type Output (Theoretical)
Output (Practical)
Hardware
Output (Practical)
Software Remarks
1 Positive
(without biasing) 07 V
2 Negative
(without biasing) 07 V
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 9
Circuit diagram RC - Coupled Amplifier
( a )
Design Given VCE = 5 V and IC = 2 mA Assume = 100
VCC = 2VCE = 2 X 5 = 10 V
Let VRE = 10 VCC = 1 V
RE = VRE ( IC + IB )
IB = IC = 2 mA 100 = 20 A
RE = 1 ( 2 m + 20 ) = 495
Choose RE = 470
Apply KVL to collector loop
VCC ndash IC RC ndash VCE ndash VE = 0
RC = ( VCC ndash VCE ndash VE ) IC = ( 10 ndash 5 ndash 1 ) 2 m
RC = 2 k Choose RC = 18 k
Let IR1 = 10 IB = 10 X 20 A = 200 A
VR2 = VBE + VE = 06 + 1 = 16 V( Since transistor is silicon make VBE = 06 V )
R2 = VR2 ( IR1 ndash IB ) = 16 ( 200 A - 20 A )
R2 = 88 k Choose R2 = 82 k
R1 = ( VCC ndash VR2 ) IR1 = ( 10 ndash 16 ) 200 A
R1 = 42 K Choose R1 = 47 k
XCE lt lt RE
XCE = RE 10
1 ( 2 f CE ) = 470 10 Let f = 100 Hz
CE = 33 F Choose CE = 47 F
Choose CC1 = CC2 = 01 F
C
B
E
SL100
or
CL100
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 10
Experiment No 02 Date ________________
RC ndash COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the frequency response input
impedance output impedance and bandwidth of a CE amplifier
b Design and build the CE amplifier circuit using a simulation package and determine
the voltage gain for two different values of supply voltage and for two different values
of emitter resistance
Apparatus
Theory
An amplifier is a circuit which increases the voltage current or power of ip signal
where the frequency is maintained constant from op to ip signal The common collector or
emitter follower circuit has high ip impedance Typically it is 200K to 300K A single
stage emitter follower has ip impedance up to 800K The ip impedance of circuit can be
improved by direct coupling two stages of emitter follower amplifier CE amplifier provides
current in turn voltage amplification The ratio of Collector current to base current is noted as
the current amplification factor and is denoted as bdquo‟ie[ = ICIB] is very large
RC-Coupled amplifier is employed as voltage amplifier and where non-linear
distortion is less because it has an excellent audio frequency over a wide range of
frequencies Circuit contain voltage divider resistor [R1 amp R2]
R1 R2 and RC are selected in such a way that transistor operates in active region Re
is used for stabilization of operating point Coupling capacitor is used to block dc current
The emitter by-pass capacitor Ce is connected to avoid negative feedback
Input signal increases base current in turn collector current increases [ie Ic = Ib]
Hence output voltage is large compared to input voltage which is known as amplification
Sl No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Transistor SL 100 01
2 Resistors as per design
3 Capacitors 47 f 01f 01 02
4 DRB 01
5 Multimeter + CRO Probes 01 Set
6 Base Board + Wires 01 Set
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 11
Tabular Column
Vi = mV
f in Hz Vo in Volts Av = (Vo Vi) Av db = 20 log (Vo Vi)
Simulation Results
Sl NO Vi in Volts Vo in Volts Av = (VoVi) Av in db Av in db using Bode plotter
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 12
Procedure
1 Components Equipment are tested for their good working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 By keeping the voltage knobs in minimum position and current knob in maximum
position switch on the power supply
4 By disconnecting the AC source measure the quiescent point (VCE and IC = VRC RC)
I) To plot the frequency response
1 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region (around 10 kHz) and the input voltage
is adjusted to a convenient value in ASG so that the output waveform is distortion less
and this value of input voltage must be kept constant throughout the experiment
2 Frequency of the input signal is varied from 10Hz to its max Value 10MHz in steps and
at each step corresponding output voltage Vo is noted down
3 All the readings are tabulated and a graph of gain in db vs frequency in Hz is plotted on a
semi log sheet
4 3db bandwidth is determined from the frequency response curve
II) To measure input impedance (Zi)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (c)
2 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region with all knobs of DRB in the Zero
position the output voltage falls to half of the initial output voltage
3 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to input impedance Zi of the amplifier +
signal generator resistance 50
Therefore Zi = DRB Value ndash Audio Signal Generator Resistance (50)
[Note Zi lt R1 | | R2]
III) To measure output impedance (Zo)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (d)
2 In the mid-band frequency region (where the gain is constant) with DRB in its max
Value the output voltage is measured
3 The DRB is varied till the output voltage falls to half the initial value
4 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to the output impedance Zo of the amplifier
[Note Zo lt Rd]
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 13
WORKSHEET
Frequency response
(b)
Input impedance Output impedance
(c) (d)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 14
IV) To find the Gain Bandwidth Product (GBW)
1 Gain Bandwidth Product = Max gain (without db) X bandwidth (Figure of merit)
= Avm X (f2 ndash f1) Hz
Results
1 Quiescent point VCE = ____ V IC = _____ mA
2 Maximum Gain Av=helliphelliphellip
3 Input Impedance Zi = helliphellipΩ
4 Output Impedance Zo = helliphellipΩ
5 Bandwidth BW= helliphellipHz
6 Figure of Merit FM (GBW) helliphellip
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 15
MOSFET Circuit Diagram
Tabular Column
Transfer Characteristics
VDS1 = _____________ V VDS1 = _____________ V
VGS in Volt ID in mA VGS in Volt ID in mA
G D S
IRF 540
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 16
Experiment No 03 Date ________________
STATIC CHARACTERISTICS OF MOSFET
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the drain characteristics and
transconductance characteristics of an enhancement-mode MOSFET
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 MOSFET ( IRF 540 ) - 1
2 Milliammeter 0-20200mA 1
3 Multimeter - 1
4 Sping board amp Connecting wires - few
Theory
A MOSFET is a voltage controlled device and requires a only a small input current
The switching speed of MOSFET is very high and the switching time s are of the order of
nanoseconds It has very high input impedance and works at very high switching frequency
MOSFETs are of two types namely Enhancement type and Depletion type Each type
are subdivided into two types namely p-channel and n-channel IRF 540 is an n-channel
enhancement MOSFET An n-channel enhancement MOSFET has N substrate with p-
impurities on other side A thin layer of metal oxide is deposited over the left side of the
channel A metallic gate is deposited over the silicon di oxide layer which is an insulator
Hence gate is insulated from the channel and for this reason MOSFET is sometimes called
insulated gate FET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 17
ID
VGS
ID in mA
VDS1
VDS2
Tabular Column
Drain Characteristics
VGS1 = _____________ V VGS1 = _____________ V
VDS in Volt ID in mA VDS in Volt ID in mA
Ideal Graph
Transfer Characteristics Drain Characteristics
ID in mA
VT VGS in V
VDS2 gt VDS1
VDS in V
VGS1
VGS2 ID VDS
VGS2 gt VGS1
Constant resistance region
Constant current region
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 18
Procedure
Transfer Characteristics
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Set VDS to some convenient voltage (say 02 V)
4 Increase VGS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
5 Repeat the above step for different value of VDS (say 03 V)
6 A graph of VGS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph Trans conductance is calculated
Output Characteristics
1 Set VGS to some convenient voltage greater than threshold voltage VT
2 Increase VDS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
3 Repeat the above step for different value of VGS
4 A graph of VDS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph drain resistance is calculated
Results
Transconductance gm = ID VGS = ____________ mho
Drain Resistance RD = VDS ID = ____________
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 5
2 Clampers
a) Positive peak clamped at reference voltage (Vr) level
Circuit diagram Waveform
b) Negative peak clamped to Vr level
Circuit diagram Wave form
Design
RL Cgtgt T
Assume T = 1 ms let RL C = 100 T then RL C = 100 ms
Let R1 = 100 K C = 1 f
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 6
CLAMPERS
Theory
Clamper adds a DC voltage to the AC level of input signal Sometimes it is necessary
to add the DC level to the AC output signal The circuits which are used to add DC level as
per the requirements to the AC output signal are called clamper circuits The capacitor diode
and resistance are the three basic elements of a clamper circuit The clamper circuits are also
called DC restorer or DC inserter circuits
Depending upon the positive DC or negative DC shift introduced in the output
waveform the clampers are classified as
a Positive clampers
b Negative clampers
A negative clamper is a circuit which adds a negative level to the AC output The
output waveform consists of a capacitor C ideal diode D and the load resistance RL During
the +ve cycle of the ip voltage Vi the capacitor gets charged through forward biased diode
bdquoD‟ up to the maximum value Vm of the ip signal Vi In the ndashve half cycle the diode D will
be remains reverse biased and the capacitor will be discharging through the resistance RL
In positive clamper by charging the orientation of the diode in the negative the +ve
clamper circuit can be achieved
During negative half cycle of the ip voltage Vi the diode D gets forward biased and
almost instantaneously the capacitor C gets charged In the positive half cycle the diode D is
reverse biased the capacitor starts discharging through RL
Both +ve amp -ve clampers are widely used for instance in television receivers to
change the reference level of video signals clampers are also used in radar and
communication circuits
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 7
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 8
Procedure
1 Components are checked for their good working conditions
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A square wave input Vi is applied through ASG
4 Keeping the ACDC knob of the CRO in DC position Output wave form V0 is observed
on the CRO
5 Clamped voltage is measured and verified with the designed values
Results
SL
No Clamper type Output (Theoretical)
Output (Practical)
Hardware
Output (Practical)
Software Remarks
1 Positive
(without biasing) 07 V
2 Negative
(without biasing) 07 V
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 9
Circuit diagram RC - Coupled Amplifier
( a )
Design Given VCE = 5 V and IC = 2 mA Assume = 100
VCC = 2VCE = 2 X 5 = 10 V
Let VRE = 10 VCC = 1 V
RE = VRE ( IC + IB )
IB = IC = 2 mA 100 = 20 A
RE = 1 ( 2 m + 20 ) = 495
Choose RE = 470
Apply KVL to collector loop
VCC ndash IC RC ndash VCE ndash VE = 0
RC = ( VCC ndash VCE ndash VE ) IC = ( 10 ndash 5 ndash 1 ) 2 m
RC = 2 k Choose RC = 18 k
Let IR1 = 10 IB = 10 X 20 A = 200 A
VR2 = VBE + VE = 06 + 1 = 16 V( Since transistor is silicon make VBE = 06 V )
R2 = VR2 ( IR1 ndash IB ) = 16 ( 200 A - 20 A )
R2 = 88 k Choose R2 = 82 k
R1 = ( VCC ndash VR2 ) IR1 = ( 10 ndash 16 ) 200 A
R1 = 42 K Choose R1 = 47 k
XCE lt lt RE
XCE = RE 10
1 ( 2 f CE ) = 470 10 Let f = 100 Hz
CE = 33 F Choose CE = 47 F
Choose CC1 = CC2 = 01 F
C
B
E
SL100
or
CL100
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 10
Experiment No 02 Date ________________
RC ndash COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the frequency response input
impedance output impedance and bandwidth of a CE amplifier
b Design and build the CE amplifier circuit using a simulation package and determine
the voltage gain for two different values of supply voltage and for two different values
of emitter resistance
Apparatus
Theory
An amplifier is a circuit which increases the voltage current or power of ip signal
where the frequency is maintained constant from op to ip signal The common collector or
emitter follower circuit has high ip impedance Typically it is 200K to 300K A single
stage emitter follower has ip impedance up to 800K The ip impedance of circuit can be
improved by direct coupling two stages of emitter follower amplifier CE amplifier provides
current in turn voltage amplification The ratio of Collector current to base current is noted as
the current amplification factor and is denoted as bdquo‟ie[ = ICIB] is very large
RC-Coupled amplifier is employed as voltage amplifier and where non-linear
distortion is less because it has an excellent audio frequency over a wide range of
frequencies Circuit contain voltage divider resistor [R1 amp R2]
R1 R2 and RC are selected in such a way that transistor operates in active region Re
is used for stabilization of operating point Coupling capacitor is used to block dc current
The emitter by-pass capacitor Ce is connected to avoid negative feedback
Input signal increases base current in turn collector current increases [ie Ic = Ib]
Hence output voltage is large compared to input voltage which is known as amplification
Sl No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Transistor SL 100 01
2 Resistors as per design
3 Capacitors 47 f 01f 01 02
4 DRB 01
5 Multimeter + CRO Probes 01 Set
6 Base Board + Wires 01 Set
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 11
Tabular Column
Vi = mV
f in Hz Vo in Volts Av = (Vo Vi) Av db = 20 log (Vo Vi)
Simulation Results
Sl NO Vi in Volts Vo in Volts Av = (VoVi) Av in db Av in db using Bode plotter
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 12
Procedure
1 Components Equipment are tested for their good working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 By keeping the voltage knobs in minimum position and current knob in maximum
position switch on the power supply
4 By disconnecting the AC source measure the quiescent point (VCE and IC = VRC RC)
I) To plot the frequency response
1 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region (around 10 kHz) and the input voltage
is adjusted to a convenient value in ASG so that the output waveform is distortion less
and this value of input voltage must be kept constant throughout the experiment
2 Frequency of the input signal is varied from 10Hz to its max Value 10MHz in steps and
at each step corresponding output voltage Vo is noted down
3 All the readings are tabulated and a graph of gain in db vs frequency in Hz is plotted on a
semi log sheet
4 3db bandwidth is determined from the frequency response curve
II) To measure input impedance (Zi)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (c)
2 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region with all knobs of DRB in the Zero
position the output voltage falls to half of the initial output voltage
3 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to input impedance Zi of the amplifier +
signal generator resistance 50
Therefore Zi = DRB Value ndash Audio Signal Generator Resistance (50)
[Note Zi lt R1 | | R2]
III) To measure output impedance (Zo)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (d)
2 In the mid-band frequency region (where the gain is constant) with DRB in its max
Value the output voltage is measured
3 The DRB is varied till the output voltage falls to half the initial value
4 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to the output impedance Zo of the amplifier
[Note Zo lt Rd]
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 13
WORKSHEET
Frequency response
(b)
Input impedance Output impedance
(c) (d)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 14
IV) To find the Gain Bandwidth Product (GBW)
1 Gain Bandwidth Product = Max gain (without db) X bandwidth (Figure of merit)
= Avm X (f2 ndash f1) Hz
Results
1 Quiescent point VCE = ____ V IC = _____ mA
2 Maximum Gain Av=helliphelliphellip
3 Input Impedance Zi = helliphellipΩ
4 Output Impedance Zo = helliphellipΩ
5 Bandwidth BW= helliphellipHz
6 Figure of Merit FM (GBW) helliphellip
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 15
MOSFET Circuit Diagram
Tabular Column
Transfer Characteristics
VDS1 = _____________ V VDS1 = _____________ V
VGS in Volt ID in mA VGS in Volt ID in mA
G D S
IRF 540
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 16
Experiment No 03 Date ________________
STATIC CHARACTERISTICS OF MOSFET
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the drain characteristics and
transconductance characteristics of an enhancement-mode MOSFET
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 MOSFET ( IRF 540 ) - 1
2 Milliammeter 0-20200mA 1
3 Multimeter - 1
4 Sping board amp Connecting wires - few
Theory
A MOSFET is a voltage controlled device and requires a only a small input current
The switching speed of MOSFET is very high and the switching time s are of the order of
nanoseconds It has very high input impedance and works at very high switching frequency
MOSFETs are of two types namely Enhancement type and Depletion type Each type
are subdivided into two types namely p-channel and n-channel IRF 540 is an n-channel
enhancement MOSFET An n-channel enhancement MOSFET has N substrate with p-
impurities on other side A thin layer of metal oxide is deposited over the left side of the
channel A metallic gate is deposited over the silicon di oxide layer which is an insulator
Hence gate is insulated from the channel and for this reason MOSFET is sometimes called
insulated gate FET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 17
ID
VGS
ID in mA
VDS1
VDS2
Tabular Column
Drain Characteristics
VGS1 = _____________ V VGS1 = _____________ V
VDS in Volt ID in mA VDS in Volt ID in mA
Ideal Graph
Transfer Characteristics Drain Characteristics
ID in mA
VT VGS in V
VDS2 gt VDS1
VDS in V
VGS1
VGS2 ID VDS
VGS2 gt VGS1
Constant resistance region
Constant current region
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 18
Procedure
Transfer Characteristics
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Set VDS to some convenient voltage (say 02 V)
4 Increase VGS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
5 Repeat the above step for different value of VDS (say 03 V)
6 A graph of VGS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph Trans conductance is calculated
Output Characteristics
1 Set VGS to some convenient voltage greater than threshold voltage VT
2 Increase VDS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
3 Repeat the above step for different value of VGS
4 A graph of VDS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph drain resistance is calculated
Results
Transconductance gm = ID VGS = ____________ mho
Drain Resistance RD = VDS ID = ____________
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 6
CLAMPERS
Theory
Clamper adds a DC voltage to the AC level of input signal Sometimes it is necessary
to add the DC level to the AC output signal The circuits which are used to add DC level as
per the requirements to the AC output signal are called clamper circuits The capacitor diode
and resistance are the three basic elements of a clamper circuit The clamper circuits are also
called DC restorer or DC inserter circuits
Depending upon the positive DC or negative DC shift introduced in the output
waveform the clampers are classified as
a Positive clampers
b Negative clampers
A negative clamper is a circuit which adds a negative level to the AC output The
output waveform consists of a capacitor C ideal diode D and the load resistance RL During
the +ve cycle of the ip voltage Vi the capacitor gets charged through forward biased diode
bdquoD‟ up to the maximum value Vm of the ip signal Vi In the ndashve half cycle the diode D will
be remains reverse biased and the capacitor will be discharging through the resistance RL
In positive clamper by charging the orientation of the diode in the negative the +ve
clamper circuit can be achieved
During negative half cycle of the ip voltage Vi the diode D gets forward biased and
almost instantaneously the capacitor C gets charged In the positive half cycle the diode D is
reverse biased the capacitor starts discharging through RL
Both +ve amp -ve clampers are widely used for instance in television receivers to
change the reference level of video signals clampers are also used in radar and
communication circuits
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 7
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 8
Procedure
1 Components are checked for their good working conditions
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A square wave input Vi is applied through ASG
4 Keeping the ACDC knob of the CRO in DC position Output wave form V0 is observed
on the CRO
5 Clamped voltage is measured and verified with the designed values
Results
SL
No Clamper type Output (Theoretical)
Output (Practical)
Hardware
Output (Practical)
Software Remarks
1 Positive
(without biasing) 07 V
2 Negative
(without biasing) 07 V
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 9
Circuit diagram RC - Coupled Amplifier
( a )
Design Given VCE = 5 V and IC = 2 mA Assume = 100
VCC = 2VCE = 2 X 5 = 10 V
Let VRE = 10 VCC = 1 V
RE = VRE ( IC + IB )
IB = IC = 2 mA 100 = 20 A
RE = 1 ( 2 m + 20 ) = 495
Choose RE = 470
Apply KVL to collector loop
VCC ndash IC RC ndash VCE ndash VE = 0
RC = ( VCC ndash VCE ndash VE ) IC = ( 10 ndash 5 ndash 1 ) 2 m
RC = 2 k Choose RC = 18 k
Let IR1 = 10 IB = 10 X 20 A = 200 A
VR2 = VBE + VE = 06 + 1 = 16 V( Since transistor is silicon make VBE = 06 V )
R2 = VR2 ( IR1 ndash IB ) = 16 ( 200 A - 20 A )
R2 = 88 k Choose R2 = 82 k
R1 = ( VCC ndash VR2 ) IR1 = ( 10 ndash 16 ) 200 A
R1 = 42 K Choose R1 = 47 k
XCE lt lt RE
XCE = RE 10
1 ( 2 f CE ) = 470 10 Let f = 100 Hz
CE = 33 F Choose CE = 47 F
Choose CC1 = CC2 = 01 F
C
B
E
SL100
or
CL100
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 10
Experiment No 02 Date ________________
RC ndash COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the frequency response input
impedance output impedance and bandwidth of a CE amplifier
b Design and build the CE amplifier circuit using a simulation package and determine
the voltage gain for two different values of supply voltage and for two different values
of emitter resistance
Apparatus
Theory
An amplifier is a circuit which increases the voltage current or power of ip signal
where the frequency is maintained constant from op to ip signal The common collector or
emitter follower circuit has high ip impedance Typically it is 200K to 300K A single
stage emitter follower has ip impedance up to 800K The ip impedance of circuit can be
improved by direct coupling two stages of emitter follower amplifier CE amplifier provides
current in turn voltage amplification The ratio of Collector current to base current is noted as
the current amplification factor and is denoted as bdquo‟ie[ = ICIB] is very large
RC-Coupled amplifier is employed as voltage amplifier and where non-linear
distortion is less because it has an excellent audio frequency over a wide range of
frequencies Circuit contain voltage divider resistor [R1 amp R2]
R1 R2 and RC are selected in such a way that transistor operates in active region Re
is used for stabilization of operating point Coupling capacitor is used to block dc current
The emitter by-pass capacitor Ce is connected to avoid negative feedback
Input signal increases base current in turn collector current increases [ie Ic = Ib]
Hence output voltage is large compared to input voltage which is known as amplification
Sl No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Transistor SL 100 01
2 Resistors as per design
3 Capacitors 47 f 01f 01 02
4 DRB 01
5 Multimeter + CRO Probes 01 Set
6 Base Board + Wires 01 Set
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 11
Tabular Column
Vi = mV
f in Hz Vo in Volts Av = (Vo Vi) Av db = 20 log (Vo Vi)
Simulation Results
Sl NO Vi in Volts Vo in Volts Av = (VoVi) Av in db Av in db using Bode plotter
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 12
Procedure
1 Components Equipment are tested for their good working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 By keeping the voltage knobs in minimum position and current knob in maximum
position switch on the power supply
4 By disconnecting the AC source measure the quiescent point (VCE and IC = VRC RC)
I) To plot the frequency response
1 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region (around 10 kHz) and the input voltage
is adjusted to a convenient value in ASG so that the output waveform is distortion less
and this value of input voltage must be kept constant throughout the experiment
2 Frequency of the input signal is varied from 10Hz to its max Value 10MHz in steps and
at each step corresponding output voltage Vo is noted down
3 All the readings are tabulated and a graph of gain in db vs frequency in Hz is plotted on a
semi log sheet
4 3db bandwidth is determined from the frequency response curve
II) To measure input impedance (Zi)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (c)
2 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region with all knobs of DRB in the Zero
position the output voltage falls to half of the initial output voltage
3 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to input impedance Zi of the amplifier +
signal generator resistance 50
Therefore Zi = DRB Value ndash Audio Signal Generator Resistance (50)
[Note Zi lt R1 | | R2]
III) To measure output impedance (Zo)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (d)
2 In the mid-band frequency region (where the gain is constant) with DRB in its max
Value the output voltage is measured
3 The DRB is varied till the output voltage falls to half the initial value
4 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to the output impedance Zo of the amplifier
[Note Zo lt Rd]
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 13
WORKSHEET
Frequency response
(b)
Input impedance Output impedance
(c) (d)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 14
IV) To find the Gain Bandwidth Product (GBW)
1 Gain Bandwidth Product = Max gain (without db) X bandwidth (Figure of merit)
= Avm X (f2 ndash f1) Hz
Results
1 Quiescent point VCE = ____ V IC = _____ mA
2 Maximum Gain Av=helliphelliphellip
3 Input Impedance Zi = helliphellipΩ
4 Output Impedance Zo = helliphellipΩ
5 Bandwidth BW= helliphellipHz
6 Figure of Merit FM (GBW) helliphellip
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 15
MOSFET Circuit Diagram
Tabular Column
Transfer Characteristics
VDS1 = _____________ V VDS1 = _____________ V
VGS in Volt ID in mA VGS in Volt ID in mA
G D S
IRF 540
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 16
Experiment No 03 Date ________________
STATIC CHARACTERISTICS OF MOSFET
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the drain characteristics and
transconductance characteristics of an enhancement-mode MOSFET
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 MOSFET ( IRF 540 ) - 1
2 Milliammeter 0-20200mA 1
3 Multimeter - 1
4 Sping board amp Connecting wires - few
Theory
A MOSFET is a voltage controlled device and requires a only a small input current
The switching speed of MOSFET is very high and the switching time s are of the order of
nanoseconds It has very high input impedance and works at very high switching frequency
MOSFETs are of two types namely Enhancement type and Depletion type Each type
are subdivided into two types namely p-channel and n-channel IRF 540 is an n-channel
enhancement MOSFET An n-channel enhancement MOSFET has N substrate with p-
impurities on other side A thin layer of metal oxide is deposited over the left side of the
channel A metallic gate is deposited over the silicon di oxide layer which is an insulator
Hence gate is insulated from the channel and for this reason MOSFET is sometimes called
insulated gate FET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 17
ID
VGS
ID in mA
VDS1
VDS2
Tabular Column
Drain Characteristics
VGS1 = _____________ V VGS1 = _____________ V
VDS in Volt ID in mA VDS in Volt ID in mA
Ideal Graph
Transfer Characteristics Drain Characteristics
ID in mA
VT VGS in V
VDS2 gt VDS1
VDS in V
VGS1
VGS2 ID VDS
VGS2 gt VGS1
Constant resistance region
Constant current region
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 18
Procedure
Transfer Characteristics
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Set VDS to some convenient voltage (say 02 V)
4 Increase VGS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
5 Repeat the above step for different value of VDS (say 03 V)
6 A graph of VGS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph Trans conductance is calculated
Output Characteristics
1 Set VGS to some convenient voltage greater than threshold voltage VT
2 Increase VDS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
3 Repeat the above step for different value of VGS
4 A graph of VDS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph drain resistance is calculated
Results
Transconductance gm = ID VGS = ____________ mho
Drain Resistance RD = VDS ID = ____________
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 7
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 8
Procedure
1 Components are checked for their good working conditions
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A square wave input Vi is applied through ASG
4 Keeping the ACDC knob of the CRO in DC position Output wave form V0 is observed
on the CRO
5 Clamped voltage is measured and verified with the designed values
Results
SL
No Clamper type Output (Theoretical)
Output (Practical)
Hardware
Output (Practical)
Software Remarks
1 Positive
(without biasing) 07 V
2 Negative
(without biasing) 07 V
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 9
Circuit diagram RC - Coupled Amplifier
( a )
Design Given VCE = 5 V and IC = 2 mA Assume = 100
VCC = 2VCE = 2 X 5 = 10 V
Let VRE = 10 VCC = 1 V
RE = VRE ( IC + IB )
IB = IC = 2 mA 100 = 20 A
RE = 1 ( 2 m + 20 ) = 495
Choose RE = 470
Apply KVL to collector loop
VCC ndash IC RC ndash VCE ndash VE = 0
RC = ( VCC ndash VCE ndash VE ) IC = ( 10 ndash 5 ndash 1 ) 2 m
RC = 2 k Choose RC = 18 k
Let IR1 = 10 IB = 10 X 20 A = 200 A
VR2 = VBE + VE = 06 + 1 = 16 V( Since transistor is silicon make VBE = 06 V )
R2 = VR2 ( IR1 ndash IB ) = 16 ( 200 A - 20 A )
R2 = 88 k Choose R2 = 82 k
R1 = ( VCC ndash VR2 ) IR1 = ( 10 ndash 16 ) 200 A
R1 = 42 K Choose R1 = 47 k
XCE lt lt RE
XCE = RE 10
1 ( 2 f CE ) = 470 10 Let f = 100 Hz
CE = 33 F Choose CE = 47 F
Choose CC1 = CC2 = 01 F
C
B
E
SL100
or
CL100
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 10
Experiment No 02 Date ________________
RC ndash COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the frequency response input
impedance output impedance and bandwidth of a CE amplifier
b Design and build the CE amplifier circuit using a simulation package and determine
the voltage gain for two different values of supply voltage and for two different values
of emitter resistance
Apparatus
Theory
An amplifier is a circuit which increases the voltage current or power of ip signal
where the frequency is maintained constant from op to ip signal The common collector or
emitter follower circuit has high ip impedance Typically it is 200K to 300K A single
stage emitter follower has ip impedance up to 800K The ip impedance of circuit can be
improved by direct coupling two stages of emitter follower amplifier CE amplifier provides
current in turn voltage amplification The ratio of Collector current to base current is noted as
the current amplification factor and is denoted as bdquo‟ie[ = ICIB] is very large
RC-Coupled amplifier is employed as voltage amplifier and where non-linear
distortion is less because it has an excellent audio frequency over a wide range of
frequencies Circuit contain voltage divider resistor [R1 amp R2]
R1 R2 and RC are selected in such a way that transistor operates in active region Re
is used for stabilization of operating point Coupling capacitor is used to block dc current
The emitter by-pass capacitor Ce is connected to avoid negative feedback
Input signal increases base current in turn collector current increases [ie Ic = Ib]
Hence output voltage is large compared to input voltage which is known as amplification
Sl No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Transistor SL 100 01
2 Resistors as per design
3 Capacitors 47 f 01f 01 02
4 DRB 01
5 Multimeter + CRO Probes 01 Set
6 Base Board + Wires 01 Set
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 11
Tabular Column
Vi = mV
f in Hz Vo in Volts Av = (Vo Vi) Av db = 20 log (Vo Vi)
Simulation Results
Sl NO Vi in Volts Vo in Volts Av = (VoVi) Av in db Av in db using Bode plotter
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 12
Procedure
1 Components Equipment are tested for their good working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 By keeping the voltage knobs in minimum position and current knob in maximum
position switch on the power supply
4 By disconnecting the AC source measure the quiescent point (VCE and IC = VRC RC)
I) To plot the frequency response
1 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region (around 10 kHz) and the input voltage
is adjusted to a convenient value in ASG so that the output waveform is distortion less
and this value of input voltage must be kept constant throughout the experiment
2 Frequency of the input signal is varied from 10Hz to its max Value 10MHz in steps and
at each step corresponding output voltage Vo is noted down
3 All the readings are tabulated and a graph of gain in db vs frequency in Hz is plotted on a
semi log sheet
4 3db bandwidth is determined from the frequency response curve
II) To measure input impedance (Zi)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (c)
2 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region with all knobs of DRB in the Zero
position the output voltage falls to half of the initial output voltage
3 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to input impedance Zi of the amplifier +
signal generator resistance 50
Therefore Zi = DRB Value ndash Audio Signal Generator Resistance (50)
[Note Zi lt R1 | | R2]
III) To measure output impedance (Zo)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (d)
2 In the mid-band frequency region (where the gain is constant) with DRB in its max
Value the output voltage is measured
3 The DRB is varied till the output voltage falls to half the initial value
4 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to the output impedance Zo of the amplifier
[Note Zo lt Rd]
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 13
WORKSHEET
Frequency response
(b)
Input impedance Output impedance
(c) (d)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 14
IV) To find the Gain Bandwidth Product (GBW)
1 Gain Bandwidth Product = Max gain (without db) X bandwidth (Figure of merit)
= Avm X (f2 ndash f1) Hz
Results
1 Quiescent point VCE = ____ V IC = _____ mA
2 Maximum Gain Av=helliphelliphellip
3 Input Impedance Zi = helliphellipΩ
4 Output Impedance Zo = helliphellipΩ
5 Bandwidth BW= helliphellipHz
6 Figure of Merit FM (GBW) helliphellip
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 15
MOSFET Circuit Diagram
Tabular Column
Transfer Characteristics
VDS1 = _____________ V VDS1 = _____________ V
VGS in Volt ID in mA VGS in Volt ID in mA
G D S
IRF 540
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 16
Experiment No 03 Date ________________
STATIC CHARACTERISTICS OF MOSFET
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the drain characteristics and
transconductance characteristics of an enhancement-mode MOSFET
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 MOSFET ( IRF 540 ) - 1
2 Milliammeter 0-20200mA 1
3 Multimeter - 1
4 Sping board amp Connecting wires - few
Theory
A MOSFET is a voltage controlled device and requires a only a small input current
The switching speed of MOSFET is very high and the switching time s are of the order of
nanoseconds It has very high input impedance and works at very high switching frequency
MOSFETs are of two types namely Enhancement type and Depletion type Each type
are subdivided into two types namely p-channel and n-channel IRF 540 is an n-channel
enhancement MOSFET An n-channel enhancement MOSFET has N substrate with p-
impurities on other side A thin layer of metal oxide is deposited over the left side of the
channel A metallic gate is deposited over the silicon di oxide layer which is an insulator
Hence gate is insulated from the channel and for this reason MOSFET is sometimes called
insulated gate FET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 17
ID
VGS
ID in mA
VDS1
VDS2
Tabular Column
Drain Characteristics
VGS1 = _____________ V VGS1 = _____________ V
VDS in Volt ID in mA VDS in Volt ID in mA
Ideal Graph
Transfer Characteristics Drain Characteristics
ID in mA
VT VGS in V
VDS2 gt VDS1
VDS in V
VGS1
VGS2 ID VDS
VGS2 gt VGS1
Constant resistance region
Constant current region
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 18
Procedure
Transfer Characteristics
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Set VDS to some convenient voltage (say 02 V)
4 Increase VGS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
5 Repeat the above step for different value of VDS (say 03 V)
6 A graph of VGS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph Trans conductance is calculated
Output Characteristics
1 Set VGS to some convenient voltage greater than threshold voltage VT
2 Increase VDS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
3 Repeat the above step for different value of VGS
4 A graph of VDS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph drain resistance is calculated
Results
Transconductance gm = ID VGS = ____________ mho
Drain Resistance RD = VDS ID = ____________
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 8
Procedure
1 Components are checked for their good working conditions
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A square wave input Vi is applied through ASG
4 Keeping the ACDC knob of the CRO in DC position Output wave form V0 is observed
on the CRO
5 Clamped voltage is measured and verified with the designed values
Results
SL
No Clamper type Output (Theoretical)
Output (Practical)
Hardware
Output (Practical)
Software Remarks
1 Positive
(without biasing) 07 V
2 Negative
(without biasing) 07 V
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 9
Circuit diagram RC - Coupled Amplifier
( a )
Design Given VCE = 5 V and IC = 2 mA Assume = 100
VCC = 2VCE = 2 X 5 = 10 V
Let VRE = 10 VCC = 1 V
RE = VRE ( IC + IB )
IB = IC = 2 mA 100 = 20 A
RE = 1 ( 2 m + 20 ) = 495
Choose RE = 470
Apply KVL to collector loop
VCC ndash IC RC ndash VCE ndash VE = 0
RC = ( VCC ndash VCE ndash VE ) IC = ( 10 ndash 5 ndash 1 ) 2 m
RC = 2 k Choose RC = 18 k
Let IR1 = 10 IB = 10 X 20 A = 200 A
VR2 = VBE + VE = 06 + 1 = 16 V( Since transistor is silicon make VBE = 06 V )
R2 = VR2 ( IR1 ndash IB ) = 16 ( 200 A - 20 A )
R2 = 88 k Choose R2 = 82 k
R1 = ( VCC ndash VR2 ) IR1 = ( 10 ndash 16 ) 200 A
R1 = 42 K Choose R1 = 47 k
XCE lt lt RE
XCE = RE 10
1 ( 2 f CE ) = 470 10 Let f = 100 Hz
CE = 33 F Choose CE = 47 F
Choose CC1 = CC2 = 01 F
C
B
E
SL100
or
CL100
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 10
Experiment No 02 Date ________________
RC ndash COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the frequency response input
impedance output impedance and bandwidth of a CE amplifier
b Design and build the CE amplifier circuit using a simulation package and determine
the voltage gain for two different values of supply voltage and for two different values
of emitter resistance
Apparatus
Theory
An amplifier is a circuit which increases the voltage current or power of ip signal
where the frequency is maintained constant from op to ip signal The common collector or
emitter follower circuit has high ip impedance Typically it is 200K to 300K A single
stage emitter follower has ip impedance up to 800K The ip impedance of circuit can be
improved by direct coupling two stages of emitter follower amplifier CE amplifier provides
current in turn voltage amplification The ratio of Collector current to base current is noted as
the current amplification factor and is denoted as bdquo‟ie[ = ICIB] is very large
RC-Coupled amplifier is employed as voltage amplifier and where non-linear
distortion is less because it has an excellent audio frequency over a wide range of
frequencies Circuit contain voltage divider resistor [R1 amp R2]
R1 R2 and RC are selected in such a way that transistor operates in active region Re
is used for stabilization of operating point Coupling capacitor is used to block dc current
The emitter by-pass capacitor Ce is connected to avoid negative feedback
Input signal increases base current in turn collector current increases [ie Ic = Ib]
Hence output voltage is large compared to input voltage which is known as amplification
Sl No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Transistor SL 100 01
2 Resistors as per design
3 Capacitors 47 f 01f 01 02
4 DRB 01
5 Multimeter + CRO Probes 01 Set
6 Base Board + Wires 01 Set
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 11
Tabular Column
Vi = mV
f in Hz Vo in Volts Av = (Vo Vi) Av db = 20 log (Vo Vi)
Simulation Results
Sl NO Vi in Volts Vo in Volts Av = (VoVi) Av in db Av in db using Bode plotter
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 12
Procedure
1 Components Equipment are tested for their good working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 By keeping the voltage knobs in minimum position and current knob in maximum
position switch on the power supply
4 By disconnecting the AC source measure the quiescent point (VCE and IC = VRC RC)
I) To plot the frequency response
1 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region (around 10 kHz) and the input voltage
is adjusted to a convenient value in ASG so that the output waveform is distortion less
and this value of input voltage must be kept constant throughout the experiment
2 Frequency of the input signal is varied from 10Hz to its max Value 10MHz in steps and
at each step corresponding output voltage Vo is noted down
3 All the readings are tabulated and a graph of gain in db vs frequency in Hz is plotted on a
semi log sheet
4 3db bandwidth is determined from the frequency response curve
II) To measure input impedance (Zi)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (c)
2 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region with all knobs of DRB in the Zero
position the output voltage falls to half of the initial output voltage
3 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to input impedance Zi of the amplifier +
signal generator resistance 50
Therefore Zi = DRB Value ndash Audio Signal Generator Resistance (50)
[Note Zi lt R1 | | R2]
III) To measure output impedance (Zo)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (d)
2 In the mid-band frequency region (where the gain is constant) with DRB in its max
Value the output voltage is measured
3 The DRB is varied till the output voltage falls to half the initial value
4 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to the output impedance Zo of the amplifier
[Note Zo lt Rd]
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 13
WORKSHEET
Frequency response
(b)
Input impedance Output impedance
(c) (d)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 14
IV) To find the Gain Bandwidth Product (GBW)
1 Gain Bandwidth Product = Max gain (without db) X bandwidth (Figure of merit)
= Avm X (f2 ndash f1) Hz
Results
1 Quiescent point VCE = ____ V IC = _____ mA
2 Maximum Gain Av=helliphelliphellip
3 Input Impedance Zi = helliphellipΩ
4 Output Impedance Zo = helliphellipΩ
5 Bandwidth BW= helliphellipHz
6 Figure of Merit FM (GBW) helliphellip
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 15
MOSFET Circuit Diagram
Tabular Column
Transfer Characteristics
VDS1 = _____________ V VDS1 = _____________ V
VGS in Volt ID in mA VGS in Volt ID in mA
G D S
IRF 540
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 16
Experiment No 03 Date ________________
STATIC CHARACTERISTICS OF MOSFET
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the drain characteristics and
transconductance characteristics of an enhancement-mode MOSFET
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 MOSFET ( IRF 540 ) - 1
2 Milliammeter 0-20200mA 1
3 Multimeter - 1
4 Sping board amp Connecting wires - few
Theory
A MOSFET is a voltage controlled device and requires a only a small input current
The switching speed of MOSFET is very high and the switching time s are of the order of
nanoseconds It has very high input impedance and works at very high switching frequency
MOSFETs are of two types namely Enhancement type and Depletion type Each type
are subdivided into two types namely p-channel and n-channel IRF 540 is an n-channel
enhancement MOSFET An n-channel enhancement MOSFET has N substrate with p-
impurities on other side A thin layer of metal oxide is deposited over the left side of the
channel A metallic gate is deposited over the silicon di oxide layer which is an insulator
Hence gate is insulated from the channel and for this reason MOSFET is sometimes called
insulated gate FET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 17
ID
VGS
ID in mA
VDS1
VDS2
Tabular Column
Drain Characteristics
VGS1 = _____________ V VGS1 = _____________ V
VDS in Volt ID in mA VDS in Volt ID in mA
Ideal Graph
Transfer Characteristics Drain Characteristics
ID in mA
VT VGS in V
VDS2 gt VDS1
VDS in V
VGS1
VGS2 ID VDS
VGS2 gt VGS1
Constant resistance region
Constant current region
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 18
Procedure
Transfer Characteristics
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Set VDS to some convenient voltage (say 02 V)
4 Increase VGS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
5 Repeat the above step for different value of VDS (say 03 V)
6 A graph of VGS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph Trans conductance is calculated
Output Characteristics
1 Set VGS to some convenient voltage greater than threshold voltage VT
2 Increase VDS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
3 Repeat the above step for different value of VGS
4 A graph of VDS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph drain resistance is calculated
Results
Transconductance gm = ID VGS = ____________ mho
Drain Resistance RD = VDS ID = ____________
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 9
Circuit diagram RC - Coupled Amplifier
( a )
Design Given VCE = 5 V and IC = 2 mA Assume = 100
VCC = 2VCE = 2 X 5 = 10 V
Let VRE = 10 VCC = 1 V
RE = VRE ( IC + IB )
IB = IC = 2 mA 100 = 20 A
RE = 1 ( 2 m + 20 ) = 495
Choose RE = 470
Apply KVL to collector loop
VCC ndash IC RC ndash VCE ndash VE = 0
RC = ( VCC ndash VCE ndash VE ) IC = ( 10 ndash 5 ndash 1 ) 2 m
RC = 2 k Choose RC = 18 k
Let IR1 = 10 IB = 10 X 20 A = 200 A
VR2 = VBE + VE = 06 + 1 = 16 V( Since transistor is silicon make VBE = 06 V )
R2 = VR2 ( IR1 ndash IB ) = 16 ( 200 A - 20 A )
R2 = 88 k Choose R2 = 82 k
R1 = ( VCC ndash VR2 ) IR1 = ( 10 ndash 16 ) 200 A
R1 = 42 K Choose R1 = 47 k
XCE lt lt RE
XCE = RE 10
1 ( 2 f CE ) = 470 10 Let f = 100 Hz
CE = 33 F Choose CE = 47 F
Choose CC1 = CC2 = 01 F
C
B
E
SL100
or
CL100
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 10
Experiment No 02 Date ________________
RC ndash COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the frequency response input
impedance output impedance and bandwidth of a CE amplifier
b Design and build the CE amplifier circuit using a simulation package and determine
the voltage gain for two different values of supply voltage and for two different values
of emitter resistance
Apparatus
Theory
An amplifier is a circuit which increases the voltage current or power of ip signal
where the frequency is maintained constant from op to ip signal The common collector or
emitter follower circuit has high ip impedance Typically it is 200K to 300K A single
stage emitter follower has ip impedance up to 800K The ip impedance of circuit can be
improved by direct coupling two stages of emitter follower amplifier CE amplifier provides
current in turn voltage amplification The ratio of Collector current to base current is noted as
the current amplification factor and is denoted as bdquo‟ie[ = ICIB] is very large
RC-Coupled amplifier is employed as voltage amplifier and where non-linear
distortion is less because it has an excellent audio frequency over a wide range of
frequencies Circuit contain voltage divider resistor [R1 amp R2]
R1 R2 and RC are selected in such a way that transistor operates in active region Re
is used for stabilization of operating point Coupling capacitor is used to block dc current
The emitter by-pass capacitor Ce is connected to avoid negative feedback
Input signal increases base current in turn collector current increases [ie Ic = Ib]
Hence output voltage is large compared to input voltage which is known as amplification
Sl No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Transistor SL 100 01
2 Resistors as per design
3 Capacitors 47 f 01f 01 02
4 DRB 01
5 Multimeter + CRO Probes 01 Set
6 Base Board + Wires 01 Set
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 11
Tabular Column
Vi = mV
f in Hz Vo in Volts Av = (Vo Vi) Av db = 20 log (Vo Vi)
Simulation Results
Sl NO Vi in Volts Vo in Volts Av = (VoVi) Av in db Av in db using Bode plotter
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 12
Procedure
1 Components Equipment are tested for their good working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 By keeping the voltage knobs in minimum position and current knob in maximum
position switch on the power supply
4 By disconnecting the AC source measure the quiescent point (VCE and IC = VRC RC)
I) To plot the frequency response
1 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region (around 10 kHz) and the input voltage
is adjusted to a convenient value in ASG so that the output waveform is distortion less
and this value of input voltage must be kept constant throughout the experiment
2 Frequency of the input signal is varied from 10Hz to its max Value 10MHz in steps and
at each step corresponding output voltage Vo is noted down
3 All the readings are tabulated and a graph of gain in db vs frequency in Hz is plotted on a
semi log sheet
4 3db bandwidth is determined from the frequency response curve
II) To measure input impedance (Zi)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (c)
2 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region with all knobs of DRB in the Zero
position the output voltage falls to half of the initial output voltage
3 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to input impedance Zi of the amplifier +
signal generator resistance 50
Therefore Zi = DRB Value ndash Audio Signal Generator Resistance (50)
[Note Zi lt R1 | | R2]
III) To measure output impedance (Zo)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (d)
2 In the mid-band frequency region (where the gain is constant) with DRB in its max
Value the output voltage is measured
3 The DRB is varied till the output voltage falls to half the initial value
4 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to the output impedance Zo of the amplifier
[Note Zo lt Rd]
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 13
WORKSHEET
Frequency response
(b)
Input impedance Output impedance
(c) (d)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 14
IV) To find the Gain Bandwidth Product (GBW)
1 Gain Bandwidth Product = Max gain (without db) X bandwidth (Figure of merit)
= Avm X (f2 ndash f1) Hz
Results
1 Quiescent point VCE = ____ V IC = _____ mA
2 Maximum Gain Av=helliphelliphellip
3 Input Impedance Zi = helliphellipΩ
4 Output Impedance Zo = helliphellipΩ
5 Bandwidth BW= helliphellipHz
6 Figure of Merit FM (GBW) helliphellip
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 15
MOSFET Circuit Diagram
Tabular Column
Transfer Characteristics
VDS1 = _____________ V VDS1 = _____________ V
VGS in Volt ID in mA VGS in Volt ID in mA
G D S
IRF 540
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 16
Experiment No 03 Date ________________
STATIC CHARACTERISTICS OF MOSFET
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the drain characteristics and
transconductance characteristics of an enhancement-mode MOSFET
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 MOSFET ( IRF 540 ) - 1
2 Milliammeter 0-20200mA 1
3 Multimeter - 1
4 Sping board amp Connecting wires - few
Theory
A MOSFET is a voltage controlled device and requires a only a small input current
The switching speed of MOSFET is very high and the switching time s are of the order of
nanoseconds It has very high input impedance and works at very high switching frequency
MOSFETs are of two types namely Enhancement type and Depletion type Each type
are subdivided into two types namely p-channel and n-channel IRF 540 is an n-channel
enhancement MOSFET An n-channel enhancement MOSFET has N substrate with p-
impurities on other side A thin layer of metal oxide is deposited over the left side of the
channel A metallic gate is deposited over the silicon di oxide layer which is an insulator
Hence gate is insulated from the channel and for this reason MOSFET is sometimes called
insulated gate FET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 17
ID
VGS
ID in mA
VDS1
VDS2
Tabular Column
Drain Characteristics
VGS1 = _____________ V VGS1 = _____________ V
VDS in Volt ID in mA VDS in Volt ID in mA
Ideal Graph
Transfer Characteristics Drain Characteristics
ID in mA
VT VGS in V
VDS2 gt VDS1
VDS in V
VGS1
VGS2 ID VDS
VGS2 gt VGS1
Constant resistance region
Constant current region
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 18
Procedure
Transfer Characteristics
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Set VDS to some convenient voltage (say 02 V)
4 Increase VGS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
5 Repeat the above step for different value of VDS (say 03 V)
6 A graph of VGS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph Trans conductance is calculated
Output Characteristics
1 Set VGS to some convenient voltage greater than threshold voltage VT
2 Increase VDS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
3 Repeat the above step for different value of VGS
4 A graph of VDS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph drain resistance is calculated
Results
Transconductance gm = ID VGS = ____________ mho
Drain Resistance RD = VDS ID = ____________
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 10
Experiment No 02 Date ________________
RC ndash COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the frequency response input
impedance output impedance and bandwidth of a CE amplifier
b Design and build the CE amplifier circuit using a simulation package and determine
the voltage gain for two different values of supply voltage and for two different values
of emitter resistance
Apparatus
Theory
An amplifier is a circuit which increases the voltage current or power of ip signal
where the frequency is maintained constant from op to ip signal The common collector or
emitter follower circuit has high ip impedance Typically it is 200K to 300K A single
stage emitter follower has ip impedance up to 800K The ip impedance of circuit can be
improved by direct coupling two stages of emitter follower amplifier CE amplifier provides
current in turn voltage amplification The ratio of Collector current to base current is noted as
the current amplification factor and is denoted as bdquo‟ie[ = ICIB] is very large
RC-Coupled amplifier is employed as voltage amplifier and where non-linear
distortion is less because it has an excellent audio frequency over a wide range of
frequencies Circuit contain voltage divider resistor [R1 amp R2]
R1 R2 and RC are selected in such a way that transistor operates in active region Re
is used for stabilization of operating point Coupling capacitor is used to block dc current
The emitter by-pass capacitor Ce is connected to avoid negative feedback
Input signal increases base current in turn collector current increases [ie Ic = Ib]
Hence output voltage is large compared to input voltage which is known as amplification
Sl No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Transistor SL 100 01
2 Resistors as per design
3 Capacitors 47 f 01f 01 02
4 DRB 01
5 Multimeter + CRO Probes 01 Set
6 Base Board + Wires 01 Set
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 11
Tabular Column
Vi = mV
f in Hz Vo in Volts Av = (Vo Vi) Av db = 20 log (Vo Vi)
Simulation Results
Sl NO Vi in Volts Vo in Volts Av = (VoVi) Av in db Av in db using Bode plotter
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 12
Procedure
1 Components Equipment are tested for their good working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 By keeping the voltage knobs in minimum position and current knob in maximum
position switch on the power supply
4 By disconnecting the AC source measure the quiescent point (VCE and IC = VRC RC)
I) To plot the frequency response
1 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region (around 10 kHz) and the input voltage
is adjusted to a convenient value in ASG so that the output waveform is distortion less
and this value of input voltage must be kept constant throughout the experiment
2 Frequency of the input signal is varied from 10Hz to its max Value 10MHz in steps and
at each step corresponding output voltage Vo is noted down
3 All the readings are tabulated and a graph of gain in db vs frequency in Hz is plotted on a
semi log sheet
4 3db bandwidth is determined from the frequency response curve
II) To measure input impedance (Zi)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (c)
2 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region with all knobs of DRB in the Zero
position the output voltage falls to half of the initial output voltage
3 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to input impedance Zi of the amplifier +
signal generator resistance 50
Therefore Zi = DRB Value ndash Audio Signal Generator Resistance (50)
[Note Zi lt R1 | | R2]
III) To measure output impedance (Zo)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (d)
2 In the mid-band frequency region (where the gain is constant) with DRB in its max
Value the output voltage is measured
3 The DRB is varied till the output voltage falls to half the initial value
4 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to the output impedance Zo of the amplifier
[Note Zo lt Rd]
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 13
WORKSHEET
Frequency response
(b)
Input impedance Output impedance
(c) (d)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 14
IV) To find the Gain Bandwidth Product (GBW)
1 Gain Bandwidth Product = Max gain (without db) X bandwidth (Figure of merit)
= Avm X (f2 ndash f1) Hz
Results
1 Quiescent point VCE = ____ V IC = _____ mA
2 Maximum Gain Av=helliphelliphellip
3 Input Impedance Zi = helliphellipΩ
4 Output Impedance Zo = helliphellipΩ
5 Bandwidth BW= helliphellipHz
6 Figure of Merit FM (GBW) helliphellip
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 15
MOSFET Circuit Diagram
Tabular Column
Transfer Characteristics
VDS1 = _____________ V VDS1 = _____________ V
VGS in Volt ID in mA VGS in Volt ID in mA
G D S
IRF 540
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 16
Experiment No 03 Date ________________
STATIC CHARACTERISTICS OF MOSFET
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the drain characteristics and
transconductance characteristics of an enhancement-mode MOSFET
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 MOSFET ( IRF 540 ) - 1
2 Milliammeter 0-20200mA 1
3 Multimeter - 1
4 Sping board amp Connecting wires - few
Theory
A MOSFET is a voltage controlled device and requires a only a small input current
The switching speed of MOSFET is very high and the switching time s are of the order of
nanoseconds It has very high input impedance and works at very high switching frequency
MOSFETs are of two types namely Enhancement type and Depletion type Each type
are subdivided into two types namely p-channel and n-channel IRF 540 is an n-channel
enhancement MOSFET An n-channel enhancement MOSFET has N substrate with p-
impurities on other side A thin layer of metal oxide is deposited over the left side of the
channel A metallic gate is deposited over the silicon di oxide layer which is an insulator
Hence gate is insulated from the channel and for this reason MOSFET is sometimes called
insulated gate FET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 17
ID
VGS
ID in mA
VDS1
VDS2
Tabular Column
Drain Characteristics
VGS1 = _____________ V VGS1 = _____________ V
VDS in Volt ID in mA VDS in Volt ID in mA
Ideal Graph
Transfer Characteristics Drain Characteristics
ID in mA
VT VGS in V
VDS2 gt VDS1
VDS in V
VGS1
VGS2 ID VDS
VGS2 gt VGS1
Constant resistance region
Constant current region
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 18
Procedure
Transfer Characteristics
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Set VDS to some convenient voltage (say 02 V)
4 Increase VGS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
5 Repeat the above step for different value of VDS (say 03 V)
6 A graph of VGS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph Trans conductance is calculated
Output Characteristics
1 Set VGS to some convenient voltage greater than threshold voltage VT
2 Increase VDS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
3 Repeat the above step for different value of VGS
4 A graph of VDS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph drain resistance is calculated
Results
Transconductance gm = ID VGS = ____________ mho
Drain Resistance RD = VDS ID = ____________
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 11
Tabular Column
Vi = mV
f in Hz Vo in Volts Av = (Vo Vi) Av db = 20 log (Vo Vi)
Simulation Results
Sl NO Vi in Volts Vo in Volts Av = (VoVi) Av in db Av in db using Bode plotter
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 12
Procedure
1 Components Equipment are tested for their good working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 By keeping the voltage knobs in minimum position and current knob in maximum
position switch on the power supply
4 By disconnecting the AC source measure the quiescent point (VCE and IC = VRC RC)
I) To plot the frequency response
1 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region (around 10 kHz) and the input voltage
is adjusted to a convenient value in ASG so that the output waveform is distortion less
and this value of input voltage must be kept constant throughout the experiment
2 Frequency of the input signal is varied from 10Hz to its max Value 10MHz in steps and
at each step corresponding output voltage Vo is noted down
3 All the readings are tabulated and a graph of gain in db vs frequency in Hz is plotted on a
semi log sheet
4 3db bandwidth is determined from the frequency response curve
II) To measure input impedance (Zi)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (c)
2 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region with all knobs of DRB in the Zero
position the output voltage falls to half of the initial output voltage
3 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to input impedance Zi of the amplifier +
signal generator resistance 50
Therefore Zi = DRB Value ndash Audio Signal Generator Resistance (50)
[Note Zi lt R1 | | R2]
III) To measure output impedance (Zo)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (d)
2 In the mid-band frequency region (where the gain is constant) with DRB in its max
Value the output voltage is measured
3 The DRB is varied till the output voltage falls to half the initial value
4 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to the output impedance Zo of the amplifier
[Note Zo lt Rd]
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 13
WORKSHEET
Frequency response
(b)
Input impedance Output impedance
(c) (d)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 14
IV) To find the Gain Bandwidth Product (GBW)
1 Gain Bandwidth Product = Max gain (without db) X bandwidth (Figure of merit)
= Avm X (f2 ndash f1) Hz
Results
1 Quiescent point VCE = ____ V IC = _____ mA
2 Maximum Gain Av=helliphelliphellip
3 Input Impedance Zi = helliphellipΩ
4 Output Impedance Zo = helliphellipΩ
5 Bandwidth BW= helliphellipHz
6 Figure of Merit FM (GBW) helliphellip
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 15
MOSFET Circuit Diagram
Tabular Column
Transfer Characteristics
VDS1 = _____________ V VDS1 = _____________ V
VGS in Volt ID in mA VGS in Volt ID in mA
G D S
IRF 540
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 16
Experiment No 03 Date ________________
STATIC CHARACTERISTICS OF MOSFET
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the drain characteristics and
transconductance characteristics of an enhancement-mode MOSFET
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 MOSFET ( IRF 540 ) - 1
2 Milliammeter 0-20200mA 1
3 Multimeter - 1
4 Sping board amp Connecting wires - few
Theory
A MOSFET is a voltage controlled device and requires a only a small input current
The switching speed of MOSFET is very high and the switching time s are of the order of
nanoseconds It has very high input impedance and works at very high switching frequency
MOSFETs are of two types namely Enhancement type and Depletion type Each type
are subdivided into two types namely p-channel and n-channel IRF 540 is an n-channel
enhancement MOSFET An n-channel enhancement MOSFET has N substrate with p-
impurities on other side A thin layer of metal oxide is deposited over the left side of the
channel A metallic gate is deposited over the silicon di oxide layer which is an insulator
Hence gate is insulated from the channel and for this reason MOSFET is sometimes called
insulated gate FET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 17
ID
VGS
ID in mA
VDS1
VDS2
Tabular Column
Drain Characteristics
VGS1 = _____________ V VGS1 = _____________ V
VDS in Volt ID in mA VDS in Volt ID in mA
Ideal Graph
Transfer Characteristics Drain Characteristics
ID in mA
VT VGS in V
VDS2 gt VDS1
VDS in V
VGS1
VGS2 ID VDS
VGS2 gt VGS1
Constant resistance region
Constant current region
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 18
Procedure
Transfer Characteristics
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Set VDS to some convenient voltage (say 02 V)
4 Increase VGS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
5 Repeat the above step for different value of VDS (say 03 V)
6 A graph of VGS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph Trans conductance is calculated
Output Characteristics
1 Set VGS to some convenient voltage greater than threshold voltage VT
2 Increase VDS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
3 Repeat the above step for different value of VGS
4 A graph of VDS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph drain resistance is calculated
Results
Transconductance gm = ID VGS = ____________ mho
Drain Resistance RD = VDS ID = ____________
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 12
Procedure
1 Components Equipment are tested for their good working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 By keeping the voltage knobs in minimum position and current knob in maximum
position switch on the power supply
4 By disconnecting the AC source measure the quiescent point (VCE and IC = VRC RC)
I) To plot the frequency response
1 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region (around 10 kHz) and the input voltage
is adjusted to a convenient value in ASG so that the output waveform is distortion less
and this value of input voltage must be kept constant throughout the experiment
2 Frequency of the input signal is varied from 10Hz to its max Value 10MHz in steps and
at each step corresponding output voltage Vo is noted down
3 All the readings are tabulated and a graph of gain in db vs frequency in Hz is plotted on a
semi log sheet
4 3db bandwidth is determined from the frequency response curve
II) To measure input impedance (Zi)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (c)
2 The input frequency is kept in the mid-band region with all knobs of DRB in the Zero
position the output voltage falls to half of the initial output voltage
3 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to input impedance Zi of the amplifier +
signal generator resistance 50
Therefore Zi = DRB Value ndash Audio Signal Generator Resistance (50)
[Note Zi lt R1 | | R2]
III) To measure output impedance (Zo)
1 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram (d)
2 In the mid-band frequency region (where the gain is constant) with DRB in its max
Value the output voltage is measured
3 The DRB is varied till the output voltage falls to half the initial value
4 The value of DRB is recorded which is equal to the output impedance Zo of the amplifier
[Note Zo lt Rd]
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 13
WORKSHEET
Frequency response
(b)
Input impedance Output impedance
(c) (d)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 14
IV) To find the Gain Bandwidth Product (GBW)
1 Gain Bandwidth Product = Max gain (without db) X bandwidth (Figure of merit)
= Avm X (f2 ndash f1) Hz
Results
1 Quiescent point VCE = ____ V IC = _____ mA
2 Maximum Gain Av=helliphelliphellip
3 Input Impedance Zi = helliphellipΩ
4 Output Impedance Zo = helliphellipΩ
5 Bandwidth BW= helliphellipHz
6 Figure of Merit FM (GBW) helliphellip
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 15
MOSFET Circuit Diagram
Tabular Column
Transfer Characteristics
VDS1 = _____________ V VDS1 = _____________ V
VGS in Volt ID in mA VGS in Volt ID in mA
G D S
IRF 540
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 16
Experiment No 03 Date ________________
STATIC CHARACTERISTICS OF MOSFET
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the drain characteristics and
transconductance characteristics of an enhancement-mode MOSFET
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 MOSFET ( IRF 540 ) - 1
2 Milliammeter 0-20200mA 1
3 Multimeter - 1
4 Sping board amp Connecting wires - few
Theory
A MOSFET is a voltage controlled device and requires a only a small input current
The switching speed of MOSFET is very high and the switching time s are of the order of
nanoseconds It has very high input impedance and works at very high switching frequency
MOSFETs are of two types namely Enhancement type and Depletion type Each type
are subdivided into two types namely p-channel and n-channel IRF 540 is an n-channel
enhancement MOSFET An n-channel enhancement MOSFET has N substrate with p-
impurities on other side A thin layer of metal oxide is deposited over the left side of the
channel A metallic gate is deposited over the silicon di oxide layer which is an insulator
Hence gate is insulated from the channel and for this reason MOSFET is sometimes called
insulated gate FET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 17
ID
VGS
ID in mA
VDS1
VDS2
Tabular Column
Drain Characteristics
VGS1 = _____________ V VGS1 = _____________ V
VDS in Volt ID in mA VDS in Volt ID in mA
Ideal Graph
Transfer Characteristics Drain Characteristics
ID in mA
VT VGS in V
VDS2 gt VDS1
VDS in V
VGS1
VGS2 ID VDS
VGS2 gt VGS1
Constant resistance region
Constant current region
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 18
Procedure
Transfer Characteristics
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Set VDS to some convenient voltage (say 02 V)
4 Increase VGS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
5 Repeat the above step for different value of VDS (say 03 V)
6 A graph of VGS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph Trans conductance is calculated
Output Characteristics
1 Set VGS to some convenient voltage greater than threshold voltage VT
2 Increase VDS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
3 Repeat the above step for different value of VGS
4 A graph of VDS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph drain resistance is calculated
Results
Transconductance gm = ID VGS = ____________ mho
Drain Resistance RD = VDS ID = ____________
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 13
WORKSHEET
Frequency response
(b)
Input impedance Output impedance
(c) (d)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 14
IV) To find the Gain Bandwidth Product (GBW)
1 Gain Bandwidth Product = Max gain (without db) X bandwidth (Figure of merit)
= Avm X (f2 ndash f1) Hz
Results
1 Quiescent point VCE = ____ V IC = _____ mA
2 Maximum Gain Av=helliphelliphellip
3 Input Impedance Zi = helliphellipΩ
4 Output Impedance Zo = helliphellipΩ
5 Bandwidth BW= helliphellipHz
6 Figure of Merit FM (GBW) helliphellip
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 15
MOSFET Circuit Diagram
Tabular Column
Transfer Characteristics
VDS1 = _____________ V VDS1 = _____________ V
VGS in Volt ID in mA VGS in Volt ID in mA
G D S
IRF 540
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 16
Experiment No 03 Date ________________
STATIC CHARACTERISTICS OF MOSFET
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the drain characteristics and
transconductance characteristics of an enhancement-mode MOSFET
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 MOSFET ( IRF 540 ) - 1
2 Milliammeter 0-20200mA 1
3 Multimeter - 1
4 Sping board amp Connecting wires - few
Theory
A MOSFET is a voltage controlled device and requires a only a small input current
The switching speed of MOSFET is very high and the switching time s are of the order of
nanoseconds It has very high input impedance and works at very high switching frequency
MOSFETs are of two types namely Enhancement type and Depletion type Each type
are subdivided into two types namely p-channel and n-channel IRF 540 is an n-channel
enhancement MOSFET An n-channel enhancement MOSFET has N substrate with p-
impurities on other side A thin layer of metal oxide is deposited over the left side of the
channel A metallic gate is deposited over the silicon di oxide layer which is an insulator
Hence gate is insulated from the channel and for this reason MOSFET is sometimes called
insulated gate FET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 17
ID
VGS
ID in mA
VDS1
VDS2
Tabular Column
Drain Characteristics
VGS1 = _____________ V VGS1 = _____________ V
VDS in Volt ID in mA VDS in Volt ID in mA
Ideal Graph
Transfer Characteristics Drain Characteristics
ID in mA
VT VGS in V
VDS2 gt VDS1
VDS in V
VGS1
VGS2 ID VDS
VGS2 gt VGS1
Constant resistance region
Constant current region
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 18
Procedure
Transfer Characteristics
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Set VDS to some convenient voltage (say 02 V)
4 Increase VGS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
5 Repeat the above step for different value of VDS (say 03 V)
6 A graph of VGS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph Trans conductance is calculated
Output Characteristics
1 Set VGS to some convenient voltage greater than threshold voltage VT
2 Increase VDS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
3 Repeat the above step for different value of VGS
4 A graph of VDS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph drain resistance is calculated
Results
Transconductance gm = ID VGS = ____________ mho
Drain Resistance RD = VDS ID = ____________
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 14
IV) To find the Gain Bandwidth Product (GBW)
1 Gain Bandwidth Product = Max gain (without db) X bandwidth (Figure of merit)
= Avm X (f2 ndash f1) Hz
Results
1 Quiescent point VCE = ____ V IC = _____ mA
2 Maximum Gain Av=helliphelliphellip
3 Input Impedance Zi = helliphellipΩ
4 Output Impedance Zo = helliphellipΩ
5 Bandwidth BW= helliphellipHz
6 Figure of Merit FM (GBW) helliphellip
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 15
MOSFET Circuit Diagram
Tabular Column
Transfer Characteristics
VDS1 = _____________ V VDS1 = _____________ V
VGS in Volt ID in mA VGS in Volt ID in mA
G D S
IRF 540
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 16
Experiment No 03 Date ________________
STATIC CHARACTERISTICS OF MOSFET
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the drain characteristics and
transconductance characteristics of an enhancement-mode MOSFET
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 MOSFET ( IRF 540 ) - 1
2 Milliammeter 0-20200mA 1
3 Multimeter - 1
4 Sping board amp Connecting wires - few
Theory
A MOSFET is a voltage controlled device and requires a only a small input current
The switching speed of MOSFET is very high and the switching time s are of the order of
nanoseconds It has very high input impedance and works at very high switching frequency
MOSFETs are of two types namely Enhancement type and Depletion type Each type
are subdivided into two types namely p-channel and n-channel IRF 540 is an n-channel
enhancement MOSFET An n-channel enhancement MOSFET has N substrate with p-
impurities on other side A thin layer of metal oxide is deposited over the left side of the
channel A metallic gate is deposited over the silicon di oxide layer which is an insulator
Hence gate is insulated from the channel and for this reason MOSFET is sometimes called
insulated gate FET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 17
ID
VGS
ID in mA
VDS1
VDS2
Tabular Column
Drain Characteristics
VGS1 = _____________ V VGS1 = _____________ V
VDS in Volt ID in mA VDS in Volt ID in mA
Ideal Graph
Transfer Characteristics Drain Characteristics
ID in mA
VT VGS in V
VDS2 gt VDS1
VDS in V
VGS1
VGS2 ID VDS
VGS2 gt VGS1
Constant resistance region
Constant current region
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 18
Procedure
Transfer Characteristics
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Set VDS to some convenient voltage (say 02 V)
4 Increase VGS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
5 Repeat the above step for different value of VDS (say 03 V)
6 A graph of VGS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph Trans conductance is calculated
Output Characteristics
1 Set VGS to some convenient voltage greater than threshold voltage VT
2 Increase VDS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
3 Repeat the above step for different value of VGS
4 A graph of VDS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph drain resistance is calculated
Results
Transconductance gm = ID VGS = ____________ mho
Drain Resistance RD = VDS ID = ____________
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 15
MOSFET Circuit Diagram
Tabular Column
Transfer Characteristics
VDS1 = _____________ V VDS1 = _____________ V
VGS in Volt ID in mA VGS in Volt ID in mA
G D S
IRF 540
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 16
Experiment No 03 Date ________________
STATIC CHARACTERISTICS OF MOSFET
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the drain characteristics and
transconductance characteristics of an enhancement-mode MOSFET
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 MOSFET ( IRF 540 ) - 1
2 Milliammeter 0-20200mA 1
3 Multimeter - 1
4 Sping board amp Connecting wires - few
Theory
A MOSFET is a voltage controlled device and requires a only a small input current
The switching speed of MOSFET is very high and the switching time s are of the order of
nanoseconds It has very high input impedance and works at very high switching frequency
MOSFETs are of two types namely Enhancement type and Depletion type Each type
are subdivided into two types namely p-channel and n-channel IRF 540 is an n-channel
enhancement MOSFET An n-channel enhancement MOSFET has N substrate with p-
impurities on other side A thin layer of metal oxide is deposited over the left side of the
channel A metallic gate is deposited over the silicon di oxide layer which is an insulator
Hence gate is insulated from the channel and for this reason MOSFET is sometimes called
insulated gate FET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 17
ID
VGS
ID in mA
VDS1
VDS2
Tabular Column
Drain Characteristics
VGS1 = _____________ V VGS1 = _____________ V
VDS in Volt ID in mA VDS in Volt ID in mA
Ideal Graph
Transfer Characteristics Drain Characteristics
ID in mA
VT VGS in V
VDS2 gt VDS1
VDS in V
VGS1
VGS2 ID VDS
VGS2 gt VGS1
Constant resistance region
Constant current region
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 18
Procedure
Transfer Characteristics
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Set VDS to some convenient voltage (say 02 V)
4 Increase VGS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
5 Repeat the above step for different value of VDS (say 03 V)
6 A graph of VGS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph Trans conductance is calculated
Output Characteristics
1 Set VGS to some convenient voltage greater than threshold voltage VT
2 Increase VDS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
3 Repeat the above step for different value of VGS
4 A graph of VDS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph drain resistance is calculated
Results
Transconductance gm = ID VGS = ____________ mho
Drain Resistance RD = VDS ID = ____________
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 16
Experiment No 03 Date ________________
STATIC CHARACTERISTICS OF MOSFET
AIM
a Design and construct a suitable circuit and determine the drain characteristics and
transconductance characteristics of an enhancement-mode MOSFET
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 MOSFET ( IRF 540 ) - 1
2 Milliammeter 0-20200mA 1
3 Multimeter - 1
4 Sping board amp Connecting wires - few
Theory
A MOSFET is a voltage controlled device and requires a only a small input current
The switching speed of MOSFET is very high and the switching time s are of the order of
nanoseconds It has very high input impedance and works at very high switching frequency
MOSFETs are of two types namely Enhancement type and Depletion type Each type
are subdivided into two types namely p-channel and n-channel IRF 540 is an n-channel
enhancement MOSFET An n-channel enhancement MOSFET has N substrate with p-
impurities on other side A thin layer of metal oxide is deposited over the left side of the
channel A metallic gate is deposited over the silicon di oxide layer which is an insulator
Hence gate is insulated from the channel and for this reason MOSFET is sometimes called
insulated gate FET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 17
ID
VGS
ID in mA
VDS1
VDS2
Tabular Column
Drain Characteristics
VGS1 = _____________ V VGS1 = _____________ V
VDS in Volt ID in mA VDS in Volt ID in mA
Ideal Graph
Transfer Characteristics Drain Characteristics
ID in mA
VT VGS in V
VDS2 gt VDS1
VDS in V
VGS1
VGS2 ID VDS
VGS2 gt VGS1
Constant resistance region
Constant current region
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 18
Procedure
Transfer Characteristics
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Set VDS to some convenient voltage (say 02 V)
4 Increase VGS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
5 Repeat the above step for different value of VDS (say 03 V)
6 A graph of VGS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph Trans conductance is calculated
Output Characteristics
1 Set VGS to some convenient voltage greater than threshold voltage VT
2 Increase VDS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
3 Repeat the above step for different value of VGS
4 A graph of VDS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph drain resistance is calculated
Results
Transconductance gm = ID VGS = ____________ mho
Drain Resistance RD = VDS ID = ____________
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 17
ID
VGS
ID in mA
VDS1
VDS2
Tabular Column
Drain Characteristics
VGS1 = _____________ V VGS1 = _____________ V
VDS in Volt ID in mA VDS in Volt ID in mA
Ideal Graph
Transfer Characteristics Drain Characteristics
ID in mA
VT VGS in V
VDS2 gt VDS1
VDS in V
VGS1
VGS2 ID VDS
VGS2 gt VGS1
Constant resistance region
Constant current region
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 18
Procedure
Transfer Characteristics
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Set VDS to some convenient voltage (say 02 V)
4 Increase VGS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
5 Repeat the above step for different value of VDS (say 03 V)
6 A graph of VGS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph Trans conductance is calculated
Output Characteristics
1 Set VGS to some convenient voltage greater than threshold voltage VT
2 Increase VDS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
3 Repeat the above step for different value of VGS
4 A graph of VDS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph drain resistance is calculated
Results
Transconductance gm = ID VGS = ____________ mho
Drain Resistance RD = VDS ID = ____________
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 18
Procedure
Transfer Characteristics
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Set VDS to some convenient voltage (say 02 V)
4 Increase VGS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
5 Repeat the above step for different value of VDS (say 03 V)
6 A graph of VGS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph Trans conductance is calculated
Output Characteristics
1 Set VGS to some convenient voltage greater than threshold voltage VT
2 Increase VDS gradually and note down the corresponding changes in drain current ID
3 Repeat the above step for different value of VGS
4 A graph of VDS Vs ID is plotted and from the graph drain resistance is calculated
Results
Transconductance gm = ID VGS = ____________ mho
Drain Resistance RD = VDS ID = ____________
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 19
CMOS Inverter Circuit Diagram
The left hand part of the above circuit shows the connection of a CMOS inverter
XLA1 stands for Logical Analyzer
The right hand part shows the wave forms of a CMOS
If the PMOS is ON NMOS is OFF and If NMOS is ON PMOS is OFF
If VGS = +ve NMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or ndashve NMOS is OFF
If VGS = -ve PMOS is ON For VGS = 0 or +ve PMOS is OFF
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 20
b) Design and build CMOS inverter using a simulation package and verify its truth table
CMOS INVERTER
A CMOS gate a building block of a digital IC is composed of an n-channel (NMOS)
and p-channel (PMOS) metal-oxide-semiconductor field effect transistors (MOSFETs) In
the circuit diagram the PMOS device appears in the upper region (connected to a dc bias
VCC logic 1) and the NMOS device appears in the lower region (connected to the ground
potential GND logic 0)
For operation the input Vin connected to the Gate terminals of both NMOS and
PMOS turns ON one device type and turns OFF the other device type The ONOFF
behavior of a MOSFET device depends on whether the voltage difference between Gate and
Source Vgs is greater or less than the threshold voltage VT which is a property intrinsic to
the device1 (ie device structure and material property) When a MOSFET device is ON its
channel region (the tall rectangle in the middle of the transistor symbol the left-hand-side
diagram) is filled with charge carriers (blue for electrons and red for holes) and thus that
device electrically connects (or short circuits) the output Vout to the high voltage VCC or to
low voltage GND
For the CMOS inverter Vout is connected to the VCC (ie logic 1) if the PMOS is
ON and the NMOS is OFF Vout is connected to the GND (ie logic 0) if the PMOS is
OFF and the NMOS is ON Since the transistor ONOFF behavior is controlled by the input
voltage Vin the output Vout is determined by the Inverter gate and the input
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 21
Circuit Diagram (With reference) Circuit Diagram (Without reference)
With Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
Without Reference Wave forms Transfer characteristics
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 22
Experiment No 04 Date ________________
SCHMITT TRIGGER
AIM
a Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values
and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package
for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Quantity
1 OP AMP 741 1
2 Resistors As per design 1
3 signal generator - 1
4 CRO with probes - 1 set
5 DC power supply - 1
6 Spring board and wires - 1 set
Procedure
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram
3 A sinusoidal input whose amplitude is greater than the magnitude of the UTP amp LTP is
applied a square wave output is obtained and observed on the CRO
4 UTP amp LTP points are noted
5 To obtain transfer characteristics input is applied to channel A and output to channel B
6 UTP amp LTP are measured on the transfer characteristics also and thus verified
Note The amplitude of the input voltage should be greater than the magnitude of UTP amp
LTP level
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 23
Formulas to be used
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RUTP= +V
satR +R R +R
Design With Reference
Let given UTP = 6V LTP= -2V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1 1 2 2R
1 2 1 1
V R R +R RUTP + LTP = 4 = 2 V = 2 = 2 1+
R +R R R
[eqn 1]
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 2]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Substitute R1 and R2 in eqn1 and calculate VR VR = 3V
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
Design With out Reference
Let given UTP =4V LTP=-4V Assume Vsat = 12 V
R 1
1 2
V RUTP + LTP = 0 = 2
R +R [eqn 3]
Eqn 3 = 0
22
1 2
1 2 1
V R R 1satUTP - LTP = 8 = 2 R = 2RR +R R 2
[eqn 4]
Assume R2 = 1K then R1 = 2 K
Similarly design for UTP = +4 +8 2 and ndash2 LTP = -4 +2 -4 and ndash4
R 1 2
1 2 1 2
V R RLTP= - V
satR +R R +R
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 24
Results
1 With Reference
2 Without Reference
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
Sl No UTP(TH) LTP(TH) Hardware Software
UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac) UTP(Prac) LTP(Prac)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 25
Circuit Diagram Wave forms
Design
Given f0 = 1 Khz
Relation between R1 and R2 is
R2 = 116 R1
Let R1= 10 kΩ Then R2 = 116 kΩ
To calculate R
Formula to be used 2RC
1f0
Required f0 = 1 Khz Assume C = 01microf then R= 5 kΩ
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 26
Experiment No 05 Date ________________
OP AMP RELAXATION OSCILLATOR
AIM
a Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working
b Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation
oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when
all resistor values are doubled
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 IC microA 741 01
2 Resisters As per Design -
3 Capacitors As per Design -
4 Diode BY 127 01
5 POT or DRB 20k 01
THEORY
A relaxation oscillator is a circuit that repeatedly alternates between two states at
with a period that depends on the charging of a capacitor The capacitor voltage may change
exponentially when charged or discharged through a resistor from a constant voltage or
linearly when charged or discharged through a constant current source With exponential
charging the timing is expressed in terms of time constants RC
PROCEDURE
1 Check the components Equipment for their working condition
2 Make connections as shown in circuit diagram
3 Check the output at pin 6 of op Amp
4 Measure the frequency of the output and compare with the given value
Result
Sl No f0 (Theoretical) f0 (pract) HW f0 (pract) simulation Remarks
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 27
Circuit Diagram
Astable Multivibrator Wave Form
Design
Let Time period T required be 1msec and duty cycle D = 60 = 06
Capacitor charging time = tc = 069RA C ---------- (1)
Capacitor discharging time = td = 069 RB C ---------- (2)
But d
tc
tT and any
dt
ct
ct
dutycycle
Then T
ct
D
1msec
ct
06D
06msecc
t and 04msecd
t
From (2) CR06904 2
Choose C = 001microf
R2 = 59k
Choose RB=56 k (+330)
From (1) 06= 069 R1 C
RA = 86k
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 28
Experiment No 06 Date ________________
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
AIM
Design and implement an astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given
frequency and duty cycle
Apparatus
Sl No Particulars Range Qty
1 555 timer -- 1
2 Power Supply -- -
3 Resistors As per design -
4 Capacitors As per design -
5 CRO and patch cords -- 1 set
Procedure
a) Check the components Equipment for their working condition
b) Rig up the circuit as shown in the diagram
c) Observe the out put wave form note down tc amp td
d) And calculate the duty cycle
e) Compare the theoretical value with practical value
Result
Sl No F(Theoretical) D(Theoretical) F(Practical) D(Practical)
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 29
Function Table
INPUTS OUTPUT Comments
A2 A1 A0 EN Q Q
X X X H H H If En pin is at logical high value then
irrespective of input output will be 1
L L L L D0 D0 If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 0 then output will be D0
L L H L D1 1D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 0 1 then output will be D1
L H L L D2 2D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D2
L H H L D3 3D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 1 then output will be D3
H L L L D4 4D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D4
H L H L D5 5D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D5
H H L L D6 6D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 0 1 0 then output will be D6
H H H L D7 7D If En pin is at logical zero value then
if input is 1 1 1 then output will be D7
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 30
Experiment No 07 Date ________________
MULTIPLEXER
AIM
a Given a 4-variable logic expression simplify it using Entered Variable Map and
realize the simplified logic expression using 81 multiplexer IC
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Multiplexer IC IC 74151 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
A multiplexer or simply ldquomuxrdquo is a device that selects between a number of input
signals In its simplest form a multiplexer will have two input signals 1 control input and 1
output The number of inputs is generally a multiple of 2 (2 4 8 16 etc) the number of
outputs is 1 and n control inputs are used to select one of the data inputs The multiplexer
output value is same as that of the selected data input
In other words the multiplexer works like the input selector of a home music system
Only one input is selected at a time and the selected input is transmitted to the single output
While on the music system the selection of the input is made manually the multiplexer
chooses its input based on a binary number the address input
Multiplexers are used in building digital semiconductors such as CPUs and graphics
controllers They are also used in communications the telephone network is an example of a
very large virtual mux built from many smaller discrete ones
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 31
Consider a 4 Variable expression as
f(w x y z) = sum (2457101114) + sum‟ d (89121315)
Let bdquoz‟ be map entered variable
Decimal
Value
Inputs MEV Output
F
Entry in
MEV Map
Comments
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)
If function F equals 0 for both values of MEV
enter 0 in appropriate cell on MEV map 1 0 0 0 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 1
Z (D1)
If function F complements to the values of MEV
then enter complement of MEV 3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 (D2)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 5 0 1 0 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 0 Z (D3) If function equals to MEV value the enter MEV
7 0 1 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 X X (D4) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
9 1 0 0 1 X
10 1 0 1 0 1 1 (D5)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 11 1 0 1 1 1
12 1 1 0 0 X X (D6) If both function values are X then enter 0 or 1
13 1 1 0 1 X
14 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D7)
If function equals 1 for both values of MEV
enter 1 15 1 1 1 1 X
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 32
Procedure
1 Verify all components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make the connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 33
Sample Programs
1 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a 2 Input AND gate Simulate and verify its working
Entity And1 is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
C OUT STD_LOGIC)
End And1
Architecture Behavioral of And1 is
Begin
C lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
NOTE write the VHDL code for remaining basic and universal gates Simulate and realize
the output
2 Write the Verilog VHDL code for a half adder Simulate and verify its working
Entity Half_adder is
Port (A B IN STD_LOGIC
SUM CARRY OUT STD_LOGIC)
End Half_adder
Architecture Behavioral of Half_adder is
Begin
SUM lt= A XOR B
CARRY lt= A AND B
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 34
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for an 81 Multiplexer IC Simulate and
verify its working
Entity MUX is
Port( sel IN STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(2 DOWNTO 0)
A B C D E F G H IN STD_LOGIC
Z OUT STD_LOGIC)
End MUX
Architecture Behavioral of MUX is
Begin
Process (sel A B C D E F G H)
Begin
Case sel is
When ldquo000rdquo =gt Z lt= A
When ldquo001rdquo =gt Z lt= B
When ldquo010rdquo =gt Z lt= C
When ldquo011rdquo =gt Z lt= D
When ldquo100rdquo =gt Z lt= E
When ldquo101rdquo =gt Z lt= F
When ldquo110rdquo =gt Z lt= G
When ldquo111rdquo =gt Z lt= H
When others =gt NULL
End Case
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 35
Circuit diagram
JK FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
J K Clk Q Q
0 0 Posndash edge No Change
0 1 Posndash edge 0 1
1 0 Posndash edge 1 0
1 1 Posndash edge Toggle
X X Neg-edge No Change
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 36
Experiment No 08 Date ________________
MS ndash JK FLIP FLOP
AIM
a Realize a J-K Master Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table
Apparatus
SI No Particulars Specification Quantity
1 3 input Nand IC 7410 01
2 Input Nand IC 7400 02
3 Trainer kit --- 01
4 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
JK flip-flop provides the solution for SR flip-flop problem Compared to SR flip-flop
JK flip-flop has two new connections from the Q and Q outputs back to the original input
gates JK flip-flop behaves like the SR flip-flop except for input condition 1 and 1 Its output
toggles for every clock pulse input unlike SR flip-flop Although JK flip-flop circuit is an
improvement on the clocked SR flip-flop it still suffers from timing problems called race
This problem can be solved by Master-slave flip-flop
The Master-slave JK flip-flop is basically two JK bitable flip-flops connected together
in a series configuration with the outputs form Q and Q‟ from the slave flip-flop being fed
back to the inputs of the Master with the outputs of the Master flip-flop being connected to
the two inputs of the slave flip-flop The circuit accepts input data when the clock signal is
ldquoHIGHrdquo and passes the data to the output on the falling-edge of the clock signal In other
words the Master-Slave JK flip-flop is a ldquoSynchronousrdquo device as it only passes data with
the timing of the clock signal
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 37
PIN DETAILS OF ICs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 38
b Write the Verilog VHDL code for D FF with positive-edge triggering Simulate and verify
its working
Entity DFF is
Port (D CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q OUT STD_LOGIC)
End DFF
Architecture Behavioral of DFF is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= D
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 39
Circuit diagram of Mod ndash 8 counter
DESIGN FOR MOD 8 UP COUNTER
Present State Next state Flip flop inputs
QC QB QA QC+1 QB+1 QA+1 KC JC KB JB KA JA
0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 X 0 X 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 X 0 X 1 1 X
0 1 0 0 1 1 X 0 0 X X 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 X 1 1 X 1 X
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 X X 0 X 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X 1 1 X
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 X X 1
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 X 1 X 1 X
Design
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 40
Experiment No 09 Date ________________
SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a mod-n (nlt8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip-Flop
ICs and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars RangeSpecification Qty
1 JK flip-flop IC 7476 2
2 2 input Nand IC 7400 1
3 2 input And IC 7408 1
4 Digital IC trainer kit --- 1
5 Patch cords --- 20
Theory
In digital logic and computing a counter is a device which stores (and sometimes
displays) the number of times a particular event or process has occurred often in relationship
to a clock signal
A synchronous counter is one whose output bits change sate simultaneously Such a
counter circuit can be built from JK flip-flop by connecting all the clock inputs together so
that each and every flip-flop receives the exact same clock pulse at the exact same time
By examining the four-bit binary count sequence it noticed that just before a bit
toggles all preceding bits are high That is a synchronous up-counter can be implemented
by toggling the bit when all of the less significant bits are at a logic high state For example
bit 1 toggles when bit 0 is logic high bit 2 toggles when both bit 1 and bit 0 are logic high
bit 3 toggles when bit 2 bit 1 and bit 0 are all high and so on
IC 7476 contains 2 JK flip-flops with preset and clear signals
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 41
Mod-5 Circuit Diagram
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 42
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for mod-8 up counter Simulate and verify
its working
Entity Mod8 is
Port (CLK CLR IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (2 DOWNTO 0))
End Mod8
Architecture Behavioral of Mod8 is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = ‟1‟) then
If (CLR = bdquo1‟) then
Q lt= ldquo000rdquo
Else Q lt= Q + 1
End if
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 43
Pin diagram
OPERATION OF 7495
Mode-0 for serial shifting of data
Mode-1 for parallel loading of data
Clk 1 is used for right shifting of data
Clk 2 is used for left shifting of data and for parallel
loading of data
STATE TABLE
Ring counter
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 44
Experiment No 10 Date ________________
RING COUNTER
AIM
a Design and implement a ring counter using 4-bit shift register and demonstrate its
working
Apparatus
SlNo Particulars Specification Qty
1 IC 7495 7404 11
2 Digital IC trainer kit - 1
3 Patch cords - 20
Theory
A ring counter is a counter where the output of one flip-flop connects directly into the
input of another to produce a particular output pattern The ability to load the flip-flops to
particular state permits a repeatable output pattern Typically a pattern consisting of a single 1
bit is circulated so the state repeats every N clock cycles if N flip-flops are used It can be
used as a cycle counter of N states
A Johnson counter (or switch tail ring counter twisted-ring counter walking-ring
counter) is a modified ring counter where the output from the last stage is inverted and fed
back as input to the first stage A pattern of bits equal in length to twice the length of the shift
register thus circulates indefinitely These counters find specialist applications including
those similar to the decade counter digital to analogue conversion etc
IC 7495 is a 4-bit shift register with parallel inputsoutput serial output with rightleft
shifting Pin 6 decides the mode if it is at low then it will act as a serial shifter and if it is at
high then it will load the data parallel Shifting left requires external connection of QB to A
QC to B and QD to C serial date is entered at input D
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
3 Give supply to the trainer kit
4 Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 45
Johnson Counter Truth table for Johnson Counter
Johnson Counter (switched tail counter)
Clk QA QB QC QD
1 1 0 0 0
2 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 0
4 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 0
10 Repeats
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 46
b Design and develop the Verilog VHDL code for switched tail (Johnson) counter
Simulate and verify its working
Entity Johnson is
Port (CLK IN STD_LOGIC
Q INOUT STD_LOGIC_VECTOR (3 DOWNTO 0) = ldquo0000rdquo)
End Johnson
Architecture Behavioral of Johnson is
Begin
Process (CLK)
Begin
If (CLK‟event and CLK = bdquo1‟) then
Q (0) lt= NOT Q (3)
For i in 2 downto 0 loop
Q (i + 1) lt= Q (i)
End Loop
End if
End Process
End Behavioral
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 47
PIN DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
R01 R02 R91 R92 QD QC QB QA
H H L X L L L L
H H X L L L L L
L X H H H L L H
X L H H H L L H
L X L X COUNT
X L X L COUNT
L X X L COUNT
X L L X COUNT
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 48
Experiment No 11 Date ________________
DECADE COUNTER
AIM
Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up
from 0 to n (nlt=9) and demonstrate its working
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Decade counter IC 7490 1
2 Trainer Kit ---- 1
3 Patch cords ---- 20
Theory
In asynchronous counter a clock signal is provided for one flip-flop and its output is
provided as clock source for next flip-flop The output of asynchronous counter is not
synchronized with clock signal
The 7490 is an asynchronous decade counter able to count from 0 to 9 cyclically and
that is its natural mode To make 7490 to work in normal mode the pin numbers 2 3 6 and 7
should hold at Low state QA QB QC QD are 4 output pins which gives the binary value of
the decimal count Pin 14 is Clock input
Pin 2 and 3 Set inputs They held to Low to activate 7490 IC as decade counter At
any instant of time if they provide High signal then the output will hold at Low state until
Pin 2 and 3 brought to Low voltage
Pin 6 and 7 Clear inputs At any instant of time if they provide High signal then the
output will hold at High state until Pin 6 and 7 brought to Low voltage
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Connect the reset terminals to high and set terminals to low and observer the output
3 And now make connection as shown in the circuit diagram
4 Give supply to the trainer kit and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 49
7490 as a Decade counter
Truth table
Clk QD QC QB QA
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
REPEATS
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 50
WORKSHEET
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 51
FORMULA
3
D82
D41
D20
D16
refV
R
fR
0V
Where the D0 D1 D2 D3 take the value 0 or 1 Rf is feed back resistor Vref if reference
voltage
Tabulation
Binary Inputs Theoritical Values(V) Practical Values(V)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Circuit Diagram
Calculation
Digital input (10)10 = (1010)2 in binary that means D0 = 0 D1 = 1 D2 = 0 D3 = 1
R = 1 KΩ Rf = 2 KΩ Vref = 5V by substituting this values in above equation we get
V2561016
1018041201
16
5
K1
K2V0
Similarly find out for all the possible input combinations and verify them
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 52
Experiment No 12 Date ________________
R-2R LADDER NETWORK
AIM
Design and construct a 4-bit R-2R ladder DA converter using OpAmp Determine its
accuracy and resolution
Apparatus
SI NO Particulars Specification Quantity
1 Resistors 1 KΩ 2 kΩ 36
2 Op-Amp IC microA 741 1
3 Trainer kit --- 1
4 Spring board amp connecting wires ---- 1 set
5 CRO amp probes or Multimeter ---- 1
Theory
An R-2R ladder is a digital to analog converter It uses only two different resistor
values throughout the circuit because of this it provides more precision than the scaled
resistor approach to DAC The weighting factors can be obtained by a thevenin analysis of
each input point
Procedure
1 Verify all the components and patch cords for there good working condition
2 Make connection as shown in the circuit diagram And give supply to the trainer kit
Provide input data to circuit via switches and verify the truth table
Result
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 53
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 54
REFERENCES
1 Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design With
VHDL 2nd
edition TATA McGraw Hill 2005
2 Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design Stephen Brown Zvonko
Vranesic TMH 2006
3 Jacob Millman Christos Halkias Chetan D Parikh Millman‟s Integrated Electronics
Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems 2nd
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
4 R D Sudhaker Samuel Electronic Circuits Sanguine-Pearson 2010
5 Electronic Principles Albert Malvino amp David J Bates 7th
Edition
6 Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Robert L Boylestad Louis Nashelsky
9th
Edition
7 Anil K Maini Varsha Agarwal Electronic Devices and Circuits Wiley 2009
8 Donald P Leach Albert Paul Malvino amp Goutam Saha Digital Principles and
Applications 7th
Edition Tata McGraw Hill 2010
9 M Morris Mano Digital Logic and Computer Design 10th
Edition Pearson Education
10 R D Sudhaker Samuel Illustrative Approach to Logic Design Sanguine- Pearson
2010
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 55
ANNEXURE ndash A
VIVA QUESTIONS
CLIPPERS AND CLAMPERS
1 Define p-n junction
2 Mention the different types of diodes
3 Explain the V-I characteristics of diode
4 Define a Clipping Circuit
5 Mention the different types of clipping circuits
6 Compare Series and Shunt Clipper
7 Mention the applications of clipper circuits
8 Define Clamping Circuit
9 What are the different types of clamping circuits
10 Define positive and negative clamping
11 Mention the applications of clamping circuits
12 What could be the voltage across the capacitor
13 What is the importance of C amp RL in the clamping circuit
RC COUPLED CE AMPLIFIER
1 Define Quiescent Point
2 State different region of operating transistor
3 What are different configurations of operating the transistor
4 Compare common base common emitter and common collector configuration of
transistor
5 Define Amplifier Mention different types of amplifiers
6 Define
7 Define bdquoEarly Effect‟ of transistor
8 Name different type of amplifier based on coupling
9 What are the factors that affect the stability of a transistor
10 Define Biasing Mention its different types
11 What are the reasons for the reduction in gain at low and high frequency
12 What is the importance of emitter-by-pass capacitor
MOSFET 1 Define MOSFET
2 What are the different types of MOSFET
3 Differentiate between enhancement mode and depletion mode MOSFET
4 Bring out the differences between MOSFET JFET and UJT
5 Explain the working of a CMOS Inverter
SCHMITT TRIGGER 1 What is Schmitt Trigger
2 Explain the working of Schmitt trigger
3 Define the term UTP and LTP
4 Define Dead band or Dead zone
5 Mention the applications of Schmitt Trigger
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR 1 Why this circuit is named as Relaxation oscillator
2 What is an oscillator
3 What are the different types of oscillators
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 56
4 Explain the working of the relaxation oscillator
ASTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
1 Define a multivibrator
2 What are the different types of Multivibrators
3 Explain the working of astable multivibrator
4 Define duty cycle
5 What is the necessity of the diode in the circuit shown of a astable multivibrator
6 Explain the operation of a 555 timer IC
MULTIPLEXER
1 What is a multiplexer
2 What is the advantage of using VEM Technique
3 What is the importance of Enable Pin
4 Differentiate between a MUX and a Decoder
5 What is the importance of select line in a MUX
6 How to decide the number of Select lines for any MUX
FLIP FLOPS
1 Differentiate between a latch and a Flip-Flop
2 What are the different types of flip-flops Explain by showing the truth table
3 What is Race-around problem How can you rectify it
4 Differentiate between Sequential and Combinational circuits
5 Explain the working of a MS-JK flip-flop
6 What are the difference between +ve edge triggered and ndashve edge triggered circuit
7 What is a counter
8 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters
9 What types of flip-flops can be used to implement the memory elements of a counter
10 Explain the use of PRESET and CLEAR pins in flip-flop
SHIFT REGISTERS AND COUNTERS
1 What are registers
2 What are shift registers
3 What are the different types of shift registers
4 Differentiate between SIOP PISO PIPO and SISO
5 Differentiate between a Ring counter and Johnson counter
6 Why it is called as decade counter
7 Explain the pins of 7490 IC
8 Difference between BCD and Binary counter
9 What is the maximum count of a BCD counter
10 Mention the steps in designing a counter
11 Identify the internal components of IC 7490
R-2R LADDER
1 What is ADC What is DAC
2 Mention the types of DAC
3 What is the resolution of DAC
4 What is the advantage of using R-2R over weighted resistor method
5 Which is the fastest ADC Why
6 Mention the types of ADC
7 Give some examples of monolithic ADC and DAC
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 57
ANNEXURE ndash B
COMPONENT DETAILS
1 DIODE BY 127
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small print you
may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes
Testing a diode with a DIGITAL Multimeter
Digital Multimeter has a special setting for testing a diode usually labeled with the diode
symbol
Connect the red (+) lead to the anode and the black (-) to the cathode The diode should
conduct and the meter will display a value (usually the voltage across the diode in mV
1000mV = 1V)
Reverse the connections The diode should NOT conduct this way so the meter will
display off the scale (usually blank except for a 1 on the left)
2 TRANSISTOR
Testing a transistor with a Multimeter
Set a digital Multimeter to diode test and as described above for testing a diode
Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total)
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct one way only
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way
Testing an NPN transistor
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 58
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard transistors NPN and PNP with different circuit
symbols The letters refer to the layers of semiconductor material used to make the transistor
Most transistors used today are NPN because this is the easiest type to make from silicon
SL 100 is an NPN transistor
3 MOSFET
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
Testing a MOSFET
This testing procedure is for use with a digital Multimeter in
the diode test-range with a minimum of 33 volt over dut
(diode-under-test) If your multi-meter is less than that it will
not do the test Check your meter manual for the specs
Connect the Source of the MosFet to the meters negative (-)
lead
1) Hold the MosFet by the case or the tab but dont touch the metal parts of the test probes
with any of the other MosFets terminals until needed Do NOT allow a MOSFET to
come in contact with your clothes plastic or plastic products etc because of the high
static voltages it can generate
2) First touch the meter positive lead onto the MosFets Gate
3) Now move the positive probe to the Drain You should get a low reading The MosFets
internal capacitance on the gate has now been charged up by the meter and the device is
turned-on
4) With the meter positive still connected to the drain touch a finger between source and
gate (and drain if you like it does not matter at this stage) The gate will be discharged
through your finger and the meter reading should go high indicating a non-conductive
device
IR F540
G D S
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 59
4 OP AMP(OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER)
Where
V+ non-inverting input
Vminus inverting input
Vout output
VS+ positive power supply (sometimes also VDD VCC or VCC + )
VSminus negative power supply (sometimes also VSS VEE or VCC minus )
5 555 TIMER
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 60
ANNEXURE ndash C
INTRODUCTION TO MULTISIM
NI Multisim (formerly MultiSIM) is an electronic schematic capture and simulation
program which is part of a suite of circuit design programs along with NI Ultiboard
Multisim is one of the few circuit design programs to employ the original Berkeley
SPICE based software simulation Multisim was originally created by a company named
Electronics Workbench which is now a division of National Instruments Multisim includes
microcontroller simulation (formerly known as MultiMCU) as well as integrated import and
export features to the Printed Circuit Board layout software in the suite NI Ultiboard
Multisim is widely used in academia and industry for circuits‟ education electronic
schematic design and SPICE simulation
Steps to Proceed
Step 1 Open Multisim
Step 2 Place Components
Step 3 Wire Components
Step 4 Place a Simulation Source
Step 5 Place Measurement Instruments
Step 6 Run a Simulation
INTRODUCTION TO XILINX
Xilinx ISE
is a software tool produced by Xilinx for synthesis and analysis
of HDL designs which enables the developer to synthesize (compile) their designs
perform timing analysis examine RTL diagrams simulate a designs reaction to different
stimuli and configure the target device with the programmer
ModelSim is a verification and simulation tool for VHDL Verilog System Verilog
and mixed language designs
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components
EC amp LD LAB - 10CSL38 2015 - 16
Dept of ISE CIT Gubbi 61
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
HDL (Hardware Description Language) based design has established itself as the
modern approach to design of digital systems with VHDL (VHSIC Hardware Description
Language) and Verilog HDL being the two dominant HDLs Numerous universities thus
introduce their students to VHDL (or Verilog) The problem is that VHDL is complex due to
its generality Introducing students to the language first and then showing them how to
design digital systems with the language tends to confuse students The language issues tend
to distract them from the understanding of digital components And the synthesis subset
issues of the language add to the confusion
VHDL stands for VHSIC (Very High Speed Integrated Circuits) Hardware
Description Language In the mid-1980‟s the US Department of Defense and the IEEE
sponsored the development of this hardware description language with the goal to develop
very high-speed integrated circuit It has become now one of industry‟s standard languages
used to describe digital systems The other widely used hardware description language is
Verilog Both are powerful languages that allow you to describe and simulate complex digital
systems A third HDL language is ABEL (Advanced Boolean Equation Language) which
was specifically designed for Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) ABEL is less powerful
than the other two languages and is less popular in industry This tutorial deals with VHDL
as described by the IEEE standard 1076-1993
Although these languages look similar as conventional programming languages there
are some important differences A hardware description language is inherently parallel ie
commands which correspond to logic gates are executed (computed) in parallel as soon as a
new input arrives A HDL program mimics the behavior of a physical usually digital system
It also allows incorporation of timing specifications (gate delays) as well as to describe a
system as an interconnection of different components